WBCHSE Class 11 Physics Notes For Circular Motion

Circular Motion

WBBSE Class 11 Circular Motion Notes

A Material Particle May Possess Two Kinds Of Motion:

  1. Translational motion and
  2. Circular or rotational motion.

Sometimes the particle may possess both kinds of motion simultaneously. This is known as a mixed motion. We have already discussed translational motion elaborately in the chapter on One-dimensional Motion.

Circular Motion Circular Or Rotational Motion

Circular Motion Definition: If a particle is moving along a circular path about a point as the centre then the motion of that particle is called circular or rotational motion.

  • The surface in which the circular path lies is called the plane of rotation. A straight line drawn through the centre of the circular path and perpendicular to the plane of rotation is called the axis of rotation.
  • Let us consider a particle is revolving along a circular path of radius r and centre O. The perpendicular drawn through the point O on the plane of rotation is the axis of rotation.

Read and Learn More: Class 11 Physics Notes

  • The radius r of the circle is called the radius vector whose direction is towards the particle away from the centre. During the revolution of the particle, the radius vector also keeps on rotating.

Circular Motion Radius Vector

Angular Coordinate: Let OP be the radius of the circle, and be taken as the reference for rotation i.e., at time t = 0, the position of the particle is at point P. Let us assume that the position of the particle is at point A on the circumference of the circle after time t and the arc AP makes an angle θ1 with OP at the centre O.

  • This angle θ1 is called the angular coordinate for the position A of the particle with respect to the radius OP. Similarly, the angular coordinates of the points B and C are θ2 and -θ3, respectively.
  • So, the position of the particle on a particular circular path can be determined from its angular coordinate only. It should be noted that the angular coordinate for position C in the given figure is negative.
  • Usually, for anticlockwise rotational motion, θ is taken as positive and for clockwise motion, negative.

Angular Acceleration

Key Concepts of Circular Motion in Physics

Angular Acceleration Definition: The rate of change of angular velocity of a particle with time is called the angular acceleration of that particle.

Let us consider a particle under rotational motion whose initial angular velocity is ω1 and final angular velocity after time t is ω2. So, according to the definition

angular acceleration (α) = \(\frac{\text { change in angular velocity }}{\text { time }}\)

= \(\frac{\omega_2-\omega_1}{t}\)

Compared with the definition of average acceleration in the chapter One-dimensional Motion, this can be referred to as the average angular acceleration.

Instantaneous angular acceleration: The instantaneous angular acceleration of a particle at a given point is the limiting value of the rate of the change in velocity with respect to a time interval when the time interval tends to zero.

If the change in angular velocity of a particle in a small time interval Δt is Δω, then instantaneous angular acceleration,

α = \(\alpha=\lim _{\Delta t \rightarrow 0} \frac{\Delta \omega}{\Delta t}=\frac{d \omega}{d t} .\)

Since, \(\omega=\frac{d \theta}{d t}, \alpha=\frac{d}{d t}\left(\frac{d \theta}{d t}\right)=\frac{d^2 \theta}{d t^2}\)

If the angular velocity of a particle increases gradually, the particle is said to be moving with an angular acceleration.

For example, when an electric fan is switched on, it undergoes angular acceleration before attaining its velocity.

On the other hand, if the angular velocity of a body decreases gradually, it is said to be moving with an angular deceleration or angular retardation. For example, when an electric fan is switched off, it undergoes angular deceleration until it stops.

In the case of angular retardation, the initial angular velocity ω1 is greater than the final angular velocity ω2.

Hence, \(\alpha=\frac{\omega_2-\omega_1}{t}\) = a negative quantity.

So, angular retardation is nothing but a negative angular acceleration.

WBCHSE Class 11 Physics Notes For Circular Motion

Angular Acceleration Is An Axial Vector: As \(\vec{\omega}_1\) and \(\vec{\omega}_2\) are axial vectors, \(\vec{\omega}_2\) – \(\vec{\omega}_1\) and, hence, \(\vec{\alpha}\) is also an axial vector. When \(\vec{\alpha}\) is positive, its direction is the same as that of \(\vec{\omega}\) and when \(\vec{\alpha}\) is negative, its direction is opposite to that of \(\vec{\omega}\).

Uniform vs Non-Uniform Circular Motion

Unit And Dimension Of Angular Acceleration: Unit of angular acceleration

= \(\frac{\text { unit of angular velocity }}{\text { unit of time }}\)

= \(\mathrm{radian} / \mathrm{second}{ }^2=\left(\mathrm{rad} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-2}\right)\)

Dimension of angular acceleration = \(\frac{\text { dimension of angular velocity }}{\text { dimension of time }}=\frac{T^{-1}}{T}=T^{-2} \text {. }\)

Relation Between Linear Acceleration And Angular Acceleration: Let us consider a particle moving along a circular path of radius r, whose linear velocity changes from \(\vec{v}_1 \text { to } \vec{v}_2\) in time t. During this time interval, its angular velocity changes from \(\vec{\omega}_1\) to \(\vec{\omega}_2\).

∴ \(\vec{v}_1=\vec{\omega}_1 \times \vec{r}\) and \(\vec{v}_2=\vec{\omega}_2 \times \vec{r}\)

∴ The value of linear acceleration, \(\vec{a}=\frac{\vec{v}_2-\vec{v}_1}{t}=\frac{\left(\vec{\omega}_2 \times \vec{r}\right)-\left(\vec{\omega}_1 \times \vec{r}\right)}{t}=\frac{\left(\vec{\omega}_2-\vec{\omega}_1\right)}{t} \times \vec{r}\)

Again, angular acceleration is, \(\vec{\alpha}=\frac{\vec{\omega}_2-\vec{\omega}_1}{t}\)

∴ \(\vec{a}=\vec{\alpha} \times \vec{r}\)

Thus, the magnitude of instantaneous linear acceleration = the magnitude of instantaneous angular acceleration x radius of the circular path.

It should be remembered that in the case of pure rotation, linear acceleration changes its direction continuously, but the direction of angular acceleration remains unaltered. Whenever the axis of rotation remains fixed, the direction of angular acceleration does not change.

Geometrical Representation: Putting \(\vec{a} \text { and } \vec{\alpha}\) instead of \(\vec{v} \text { and } \vec{\omega}\), respectively, we will obtain the geometrical representation for the relation among \(\vec{a}\), \(\vec{\alpha}\) and \(\vec{r}\).

Kinematical Equations Of Rotational Motion

From the analogy of the three equations s = θ, v = rω and a = rα, it can be inferred that in case of rotational motion, angular displacement θ, angular velocity co and angular acceleration α, respectively, play the same role as that of displacement s, velocity v and acceleration a in the case of translational motion.

For this reason θ, ω and α are called the rotational analogues of s, v and a respectively. (If a quantity has similarities with another quantity, then that quantity is called the analogue of the other.)

Kinematical Equations For Uniformly Accelerated Motion Are:

  1. v = u + at
  2. s = ut + 1/2at²
  3. v² = u² + 2as

For a uniformly accelerated rotational motion, the analogues of these equations are:

  1. \(\omega_2=\omega_1+\alpha t\)
  2. \(\theta=\omega_1 t+\frac{1}{2} \alpha t^2\)
  3. \(\omega_2^2=\omega_1^2+2 \alpha \theta\)

Here, initial angular velocity = ω1, final angular velocity after time t = ω2, angular acceleration = α and angular displacement after time t = θ.

In the case of translational motion with uniform velocity, s = vt. In the case of uniform rotational motion, the analogue of this equation is θ= ωt.

Comparison Of Linear And Angular Motion With Constant Acceleration:

  1. Straight Line Motion With Constant Linear Acceleration: For an object that starts moving along a straight line with initial velocity u and constant linear acceleration a, we have
    1. a =constant,
    2. v= u+at,
    3. s =ut+ 1/2at²,
    4. v² = u² + 2as
  2. Fixed Axis Rotation With Constant Angular Acceleration: For an object that starts revolving with initial angular velocity ω0 and uniform angular acceleration α, we have
    1. \(\alpha\) = constant,
    2. \(\omega_1=\omega_0+\alpha t\),
    3. \(\theta=\omega_0 t+\frac{1}{2} \alpha t^2\),
    4. \(\omega^2=\omega_0^2+2 \alpha \theta\)

Kinematical Equations Of Rotational Motion Numerical Examples

Short Answer Questions on Circular Motion

Example 1. An electric fan is revolving with a velocity of 210 rpm. When its morion Is Increased with the help of a regulator, it attains a velocity of 630 rpm in 11 s. What is the angular acceleration of the fan? Also, calculate the number of revolutions completed by the fan in that 11s.
Solution:

Given

An electric fan is revolving with a velocity of 210 rpm. When its morion Is Increased with the help of a regulator, it attains a velocity of 630 rpm in 11 s.

Initial angular velocity, \(\omega_1=\frac{2 \pi \times 210}{60}=7 \pi \mathrm{rad} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

Final angular velocity, \(\omega_2=\frac{2 \pi \times 630}{60}=21 \pi \mathrm{rad} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

Now, from the equation ω2 = ω1+ αt we get, angular acceleration,

α = \(\frac{\omega_2-\omega_1}{t}=\frac{21 \pi-7 \pi}{11}=\frac{14 \pi}{11}=\frac{14}{11} \times \frac{22}{7}\)

= \(4 \mathrm{rad} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-2}\)

Again, angular displacement, \(\theta=\omega_1 t+\frac{1}{2} \alpha t^2=7 \pi \times 11+\frac{1}{2} \times 4 \times(11)^2\)

θ = \(11(7 \pi+22)=484 \mathrm{rad}\)

Since in a single revolution, the angular displacement is 2π, the number of revolutions

= \(\frac{\theta}{2 \pi}=\frac{484}{2 \pi}=77\)

Example 2. A wheel rolls on a horizontal path with uniform velocity. Prove that the velocity of any point on the circumference of the wheel with respect to its centre is equal to the velocity of the wheel What will be the instantaneous velocity of the point on the wheel which touches the ground?
Solution:

A wheel rolls on a horizontal path with uniform velocity.

If the radius of the wheel is r then its circumference = 2πr, and velocity of the wheel = \(\frac{2 \pi r}{T}=\frac{2 \pi r}{\frac{2 \pi}{\omega}}=\omega r\)

here, ω = angular velocity of the wheel

Again, the linear velocity of any point on the circumference of the wheel with respect to its centre is, v = ωr. So, this velocity is the same as the velocity of the wheel.

At any moment, when a point on the wheel touches the ground, its linear velocity with respect to the centre of the wheel is v and its direction is just opposite to the direction of the linear velocity v of the wheel Hence, the instantaneous resultant velocity of the point on the wheel which touches the ground = v-v = 0.

Class 11 Physics Class 12 Maths Class 11 Chemistry
NEET Foundation Class 12 Physics NEET Physics

Example 3. Starting from rest, a wheel, with uniform acceleration, attains an angular velocity of 60 rad · s-1 at the end of 30 complete revolutions. What Is the angular acceleration of the wheel?
Solution:

Given

Starting from rest, a wheel, with uniform acceleration, attains an angular velocity of 60 rad · s-1 at the end of 30 complete revolutions.

Initial angular velocity, ω1 =0.

Angular displacement at the end of 30 revolutions, θ = 30 x 2π = 60π rad

Final angular velocity, ω1 = 60 rad · s-1

Now, from the equation \(\omega_2^2=\omega_1^2+2 a \theta\)

(α = angular acceleration of the wheel) we get, (60)2 = 0 + 2a x 60/r

or, \(\alpha=\frac{30}{\pi}=9.55 \mathrm{rad} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-2} .\)

 

Circular Motion Conclusion

Centripetal Force and Circular Motion

If any particle moves along a circular path about a point as the centre, then the motion of that particle is called circular motion or rotational motion.

  • The angle subtended by the initial and final positions of a rotating particle at the centre of its path is called the angular displacement of the particle.
  • Angular displacement is a dimensionless physical quantity.
  • The rate of angular displacement of a particle with time is called the angular velocity of the particle.
  • The rate of change of angular velocity of a particle with time is called the angular acceleration of the particle.
  • If the angular velocity of a particle rotating along a circular path is constant, its motion is known as uniform circular motion.

When an object moves in a circular path with a varying speed, then the motion of the object is called non-uni-form circular motion.

There are two unit vectors of circular motion. One is the radial unit vector and the other is the tangential unit vector. The radial unit vector is directed along the radius of the circular path away from the centre.

  • The tangential unit vector is directed along the tangent of the circular path. There are two components of the acceleration in non-uniform circular motion. One is radial acceleration and the other is tangential.
  • In the case of a particle revolving along a circular path with uniform speed i.e., in the case of uniform circular motion, the acceleration which always acts towards the centre of the circle, known as the radial or centripetal or normal acceleration.
  • The force that acts normally to the direction of its velocity to rotate a body along a circular path and is directed towards the centre of that circular path from the body along the radius of the circle is called the centripetal force.

If an observer rotates with a body with the same angular velocity as that of the body rotating along a circular path, the observer will feel that a force is acting on this body which is equal but opposite in direction to the centripetal force. This force is called the centrifugal force.

Circular Motion Useful Relations For Solving Numerical Examples

1° = π/100 rad or, 1 rad = 57.296°

Distance travelled by a rotating particle (s) = radius of the path (r) x angular displacement(θ)

While revolving along a circular path, if the angular displacement of a particle is θ in time f, then the average angular velocity of the particle, \(\omega=\frac{\theta}{t}\)

If in a time interval Δt, the angular displacement of a particle is Δθ0, then the instantaneous angular velocity, \(\omega=\lim _{\Delta t \rightarrow 0} \frac{\Delta \theta}{\Delta t}=\frac{d \theta}{d t}\)

1 rpm = \(\frac{\text { one complete revolution }}{1 \text { minute }}=\frac{2 \pi}{60} \mathrm{rad} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

= \(\frac{\pi}{30} \mathrm{rad} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

Angular Velocity in Circular Motion

The value of linear velocity at any moment (v) = value of angular velocity (ω) at that moment x radius of the circular path (r)

If the initial angular velocity of a rotating particle be ω1 and that after time t is ω2, then angular acceleration (a) = \(\frac{\omega_2-\omega_1}{t}\)

Value of instantaneous linear acceleration (a) = radius of the circular path (r) x value of instantaneous angular acceleration (α)

Equations for pure circular motion of a particle with uniform angular acceleration are

  1. \(\omega_2=\omega_1+\alpha t\)
  2. \(\theta=\omega_1 t+\frac{1}{2} \alpha t^2\)
  3. \(\omega_2^2=\omega_1^2+2 \alpha \theta\)

Here, initial angular velocity = ω1, final angular velocity after time t = ω2, angular acceleration = α and angular displacement in time t = d.

If a particle of mass m revolves along a circular path of radius r with uniform speed v, the normal or centripetal acceleration of the particle = \(\omega^2 r=\frac{v^2}{r}\)(ω = angular velocity of the particle, ω = \(\frac{v}{r}\))

If the mass of the body is m, the radius of its circular path is r, its linear velocity is v and its angular velocity is ω, then centrifugal force = \(m \omega^2 r=\frac{m v^2}{r}\)

If a body of mass m revolves along a circular path of radius r with velocity v (angular velocity ω), then centrifugal force = \(\frac{m v^2}{r}=m \omega^2 r\)

Circular Motion Assertion Reason Type Question And Answers

Applications of Circular Motion in Real Life

These questions have statement 1 and statement 2. Of the four choices given below, choose the one that best describes the two statements.

  1. Statement 1 Is true, statement 2 Is true; statement 2 is a correct explanation for statement 1.
  2. Statement 1 Is true, and statement 2 Is true; statement 2 is not a correct explanation for statement 1.
  3. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is false,
  4. Statement 1 Is false, and statement 2 is true.

Question 1.

Statement 1: A pendulum is oscillating between points A, B and C. Acceleration of bob at points A or C is zero.

Circular Motion Pendulum IS Oscillationg Between The Points

Statement 2: Velocity at A and C is zero.

Answer: 4. Statement 1 Is false, and statement 2 is true.

Question 2.

Statement 1: A particle of mass m undergoes uniform horizontal circular motion inside a smooth funnel as shown, The Normal reaction in this case is not mgcosθ.

Circular Motion Uniform Horizontal Circular Motion

Statement 2: Acceleration of particle is not along the surface of the funnel.

Answer: 1. Statement 1 Is true, statement 2 Is true; statement 2 is a correct explanation for statement 1.

Question 3.

Statement 1: If a car is taking a turn on a banked road, then the normal contact force between the car and the road is greater than the weight of the car (neglecting friction).

Statement 2: On a banked road, the horizontal component of normal contact force between the car and the road provides the necessary centripetal force. Assume friction is absent.

Answer: 2. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is false,

Question 4.

Statement 1: A car takes a turn of radius 20 m with a constant velocity of 10 m · s-1.

Statement 2: In circular motion, velocity can never be constant.

Answer: 4. Statement 1 Is false, and statement 2 is true.

Question 5.

Statement 1: A particle can perform circular motion without having any tangential component of acceleration.

Statement 2: For circular motion to take place, radial acceleration should exist.

Answer: 2. Statement 1 Is true, and statement 2 Is true; statement 2 is not a correct explanation for statement 1.

Question 6.

Statement 1: Uniform circular motion is uniformly accelerated motion.

Statement 2: Acceleration in uniform circular motion is always towards the centre.

Answer: 4. Statement 1 Is false, and statement 2 is true.

Question 7.

Statement 1: In circular motion average speed and average velocity are never equal.

Statement 2: In any curvilinear path these two are never equal.

Answer: 1. Statement 1 Is true, statement 2 Is true; statement 2 is a correct explanation for statement 1.

Circular Motion Match Column A With Column B

Question 1. In Column A some physical quantities related to translational motion are given, while in Column B physical quantities associated with rotational motion are mentioned.

Circular Motion Match The Column Question 1

Answer: 1. C, 2. B, 3. D, 4. A

Question 2. A particle is rotating in a circle of radius R = \(\frac{2}{\pi}\)m, with constant speed 1 m • s-1. Match the following two columns for the time interval when it completes 1/4 th of the circle.

Circular Motion Match The Column Question 2

Answer: 1. D, 2. B, 3. C, 4. B

Circular Motion Comprehension Type Question And Answers

Read the following passages carefully and answer the questions at the end of them.

Question 1. A particle is moving along a circular path of radius 0.7 m with constant tangential acceleration of 5 m · s-2. The particle is initially at rest. Based on the above information, answer the following questions

1. The speed of the particle after 7 s is

  1. 5 m • s-1
  2. 7 m • s-1
  3. 35 m • s-1
  4. 48 m • s-1

Answer: 3. 35 m • s-1

2. The radial acceleration of the particle at t = 7 s is

  1. 1200 m · s-2
  2. 1750 m · s-2
  3. 70 m · s-2
  4. 250 m · s-2

Answer: 2. 1750 m · s-2

3. Distance travelled by the particle in 7 s is

  1. 123 m
  2. 725 m
  3. 728 m
  4. 426 m

Answer: 1. 123 m

4. The number of revolutions made by the particle in 7 s is

  1. 27.8
  2. 164.8
  3. 165.52
  4. 96.85

Answer: 1. 27.8

Question 2. A small particle of mass m attached with a light inextensible thread of length L is moving in a vertical circle. In the given case the particle is moving in a complete vertical circle and ratio of its maximum to minimum velocity is 2: 1.

1. Minimum velocity of the particle is

  1. \(\sqrt[4]{\frac{g L}{3}}\)
  2. \(2 \sqrt{\frac{g L}{3}}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{\frac{g L}{3}}\)
  4. \(3 \sqrt{\frac{g L}{3}}\)

Answer: 2. \(2 \sqrt{\frac{g L}{3}}\)

2. The kinetic energy of the particle at the lowest position is

  1. \(\frac{4 m g L}{3}\)
  2. \(2 m g L\)
  3. \(\frac{8 m g L}{3}\)
  4. \(\frac{2 m g L}{3}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{8 m g L}{3}\)

3. The velocity of the particle when it is moving vertically downward is

  1. \(\sqrt{\frac{10 g L}{3}}\)
  2. \(2 \sqrt{\frac{g L}{3}}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{\frac{8 g L}{3}}\)
  4. \(\sqrt{\frac{13 g L}{3}}\)

Answer: 1. \(\sqrt{\frac{10 g L}{3}}\)

Question 3. The earth rotates once per day about an axis passing through the north and south poles, that is perpendicular to the plane containing the equator. Assume the earth as a sphere of radius 6400 km. The two particles A and B are considered on the surface of the earth as shown. The particle A is situated at the equator and B is situated at a latitude of 30° north of the equator.

1. The speed of particle A is

  1. 465.4 m · s-1
  2. 850 m · s-1
  3. 243.6 m · s-1
  4. 1.675 x 106 m · s-1

Answer: 1. 465.4 m · s-1

2. The acceleration of particle A is

  1. 3.38 x 10-7 m · s-2
  2. 3.38 x 10-5 m · s-2
  3. 3.38 x 10-2 m · s-2
  4. 3.38 x 10-1 m · s-2

Answer: 3. 3.38 x 10-2 m · s-2

3. The speed of particle B is

  1. 405 m · s-1
  2. 403 m · s-1
  3. 706.5 m · s-1
  4. 210 m · s-1

Answer: 2. 403 m · s-1

Circular Motion Integer Answer Type Questions

In this type, the answer to each of the questions is a single-digit integer ranging from 0 to 9.

Question 1. A particle is moving along a circular path of radius 2 m with a constant angular velocity of 3 rad • s-2. Determine the angular displacement (in rad) of the particle in 3 s.
Answer: 9

Question 2. A particle moves in a circle of radius 1.0 cm at a speed given by v = 2.0t, where v is in cm · s-1 and t in seconds. Find the radial acceleration of the particle at t = 1s.
Answer: 4

Question 3. If the earth was to suddenly contract to half its present size, without any change in its mass, then what would be the duration of the new days (in hours)?
Answer: 6

Circular Motion Earth Rotated Once Perday

 

WBCHSE Class 11 Physics Notes For Friction

Law of Motion Class 11 Notes Physics

Laws Of Motion – Friction

WBBSE Class 11 Friction Notes

Friction Introduction: It is a common experience that, when a book lying on a table is pushed, it moves some distance and then stops. However according to Newton’s first law of motion, after being pushed, the book should have continued moving with a uniform velocity in the absence of any external force.

  • The fact that the book stops clearly shows the existence of some external force that affects the motion of the body. This force is the force of friction, or simply friction, or dry friction. Also, if the book is pushed slightly, it often does not move at all.
  • If the force on the book is gradually increased, it begins to move after a while. So, initially, the frictional force can balance the applied force. But, later, it is not enough to resist the motion.
  • A large number of phenomena in our daily lives, prove the existence of frictional force. Discussions in this chapter will be restricted to friction between two dry surfaces only.

Read and Learn More: Class 11 Physics Notes

Friction Definition: When two surfaces are in contact with each other and there exists a relative motion between them or an attempt is made to impart a relative motion, then a force comes into play that resists this motion or this attempt. This force is called the force of friction, or simply, friction.

The respective areas of the two bodies which remain in contact with each other are called the surfaces of contact. Friction acts parallel to the surfaces of contact in a direction opposite to the direction of relative motion that is attempted or actually occurs.

Origin Of Friction: From our experience, we find that friction between two smooth surfaces is less than that between two rough surfaces. An apparently smooth surface when examined under a powerful microscope, also shows considerable roughness on the atomic scale.

Friction Origin Of Friction

  • At the points of contact A1, A2, and A3,……. atoms of the two surfaces come very close to each other, and interatomic forces act between them. Hence, adhesion takes place between the planes. Such adhesion is the source of friction.
  • Also, due to the relative motion between the surfaces, the shape and size of the grooves change continuously. This creates waves and atomic motion which also give rise to friction.

WBCHSE Class 11 Physics Notes For Friction

Law of Motion Class 11 Notes Physics

Class 11 Physics Notes For Angle Of Repose

Consider a body of weight W, placed on a surface inclined at an angle θ with the horizontal. The normal force of the inclined plane on the body is R = W cosθ. In this case, the component W sinθ along the plane tries to set up a downward motion of the body.

  • Consequently, a frictional force develops upwards along the surface. If the inclination θ is such that the surface just prevents the downward motion of the body, then the frictional force f is the limiting friction, expressed as f = W sinθ.
  • Hence, the coefficient of friction, \(\mu=\frac{f}{R}=\frac{W \sin \theta}{W \cos \theta}=\tan \theta\)
  • Therefore, when the tangent of the angle of inclination equals the coefficient of friction, the body remains in limiting equilibrium on the inclined plane. If the angle of inclination θ is increased further, W sinθ also increases.
  • Then the limiting friction f cannot balance the body and it starts to slide down the inclined plane. The angle of inclination θ in this case, is called the angle of repose of the inclined plane.

Friction Angle Of Repulse

Understanding Types of Friction

Angle Of Repose Definition: The maximum value of the angle of inclination of a surface, for which an object placed on it is just on the verge of downward motion due to its own weight, is called the angle of repose.

Law of Motion Class 11 Notes Physics – Angle Of Repose Discussion

  1. For a very smooth surface, i.e., for μ ≈ 0, the angle of repose becomes approximately equal to 0°. This means that the surface cannot prevent the downward motion of this body, even when it is very slightly inclined.
  2. When the angle of inclination exceeds the angle of repose, then the frictional force can no longer keep the body in equilibrium on the inclined plane.
  3. The angle of repose of different objects, placed on the same inclined surface, may be different.
  4. We know μ = tanλ, where λ is the angle of friction, and also μ = tanθ, where θ is the angle of repose, for a pair of surfaces in contact.

∴ tanλ= tanθ or, λ = 6.

Thus, the angle of repose and the angle of friction are numerically equal. However, they are two different physical quantities. The angle of friction is a quantity related to friction between any two surfaces; on the other hand, the angle of repose is a property of inclined surfaces only.

Law of Motion Class 11 Notes Physics – Acceleration Of A Body On An Inclined Plane

Consider a body of mass m sliding down an inclined plane with an acceleration a. Let the angle of inclination be θ. Since the body slides down, θ must be greater than the angle of repose.

Friction Acceleration Of A Body On A Inclined Plane

Here kinetic friction acts upwards along the incline. Let the normal force of the inclined plane be R, and the coefficient of sliding friction be μ’. Hence, sliding frictional force, f = μ’ R.

Also, R = mgcosθ. The component of the weight of the body along the plane is mg sinθ, which is in the opposite direction of f. The equation of the downward motion, of the body along this inclined plane is, mg sinθ-f= ma

or, ma = mg sinθ – μ’R = mg(sinθ-μ’cosθ)

or, a = g(sinθ-μ’cosθ)

If the inclined plane is perfectly smooth, then μ’ = 0 and a = g sinθ. Hence, the frictional force reduces the downward acceleration of the body along the plane by an amount gμ’ cosθ.

Class 11 Physics Class 12 Maths Class 11 Chemistry
NEET Foundation Class 12 Physics NEET Physics

Equilibrium Of A Body On An Inclined Plane

A body of weight W is kept on a plane inclined at an angle θ with the horizontal. If θ is greater than the angle of repose, the frictional force alone is not sufficient to keep the body at rest; an external force F is required for equilibrium. Let it be assumed that the force F makes an angle α with the inclined plane.

There can be either of the two limiting equilibrium conditions—

  1. The body is about to move down along the inclined plane, or,
  2. The body is about to move up along the inclined plane.

Case 1: Equilibrium Against Downward Motion: The force of limiting friction acts on the body in an upward direction. For equilibrium, the resultants of the components of the forces acting

  1. Along The Incline, And
  2. Perpendicular To The Incline, Both Should Be Zero.

Friction Equilibrium Of A Body On An Inclined Plane

Here, f + F cosα = W sinθ …(1) and

R + F sinα = W cosθ …(2)

If the coefficient of friction is μ, then f = μR and from equation (1), μR+ F cosα = W sinθ …..(3)

Multiplying equation (2) by θ and then subtracting from (3) we get,

∴ \(F(\cos \alpha-\mu \sin \alpha)=W(\sin \theta-\mu \cos \theta)\)

or, \(F=W \cdot \frac{\sin \theta-\mu \cos \theta}{\cos \alpha-\mu \sin \alpha}\)

Again, if \(\lambda\) is the angle of friction then, \(\mu=\tan \lambda\)

∴ F = \(W \cdot \frac{\sin \theta-\tan \lambda \cos \theta}{\cos \alpha-\tan \lambda \sin \alpha}\)

= \(W \cdot \frac{\sin \theta \cos \lambda-\cos \theta \sin \lambda}{\cos \alpha \cos \lambda-\sin \lambda \sin \alpha}\)

= \(W \cdot \frac{\sin (\theta-\lambda)}{\cos (\alpha+\lambda)}\)…(4)

For given values of θ and λ, F wdll be minimum when cos(α +λ) is maximum,

i.e., when cos(α +λ) = 1 = cos 0

∴ a + λ = 0 or, λ = -λ ….(5)

∴ Minimum applied force, Fmin – W sin(θ – λ)

Class 11 Physics Friction Notes

Case 2: Equilibrium Against Upward Motion: If the body is about to move up along the incline, the limiting friction, f= μR acts downwards along the incline. The forces acting when the body is just about to move are shown. Conditions for limiting equilibrium are,

F cosα = μR + W sinθ or, F cosα-μR = W sinθ…..(6)

and F sinα + R = Wcosθ or, μF sinα + μR = W μcosθ…..(7)

Friction Equuilibrium Against Upward Motion

Coefficient of Friction Explained

On adding (6) and (7), we get F(cosα + μsinα) = W(sinθ + μcosθ)

or, F = \(W \cdot \frac{\sin \theta+\mu \cos \theta}{\cos \alpha+\mu \sin \alpha}\)

Expressing μ in terms of the angle of friction λ, i.e., μ = tanλ,

F = \(W \cdot \frac{\sin \theta+\tan \lambda \cos \theta}{\cos \alpha+\tan \lambda \sin \alpha}\)

= \(W \cdot \frac{\sin \theta \cos \lambda+\sin \lambda \cos \theta}{\cos \alpha \cos \lambda+\sin \lambda \sin \alpha}\)

= \(W \cdot \frac{\sin (\theta+\lambda)}{\cos (\alpha-\lambda)}\)

For given values of θ and λ for F to be minimum, cos(α-λ) = 1 = cos 0 or,α = λ

Class 11 Physics Friction Notes

and Fmin = W sin(θ + λ).

Special Cases: When F is applied along the plane, i.e., if α = 0, then the force required to prevent the body from moving downwards is F = \(W \cdot \frac{\sin (\theta-\lambda)}{\cos \lambda}\)…(9)

Again, the force required to bring the body on the verge of moving upwards along the inclined plane is F = \(\frac{W \sin (\theta+\lambda)}{\cos \lambda}\)…(10)

Equilibrium Of A Body On An Inclined Plane Numerical Examples

Example 1. A body is kept on a horizontal rough plane. The plane is then gradually raised to an inclination of 30° with the horizontal and the body starts to slide down. The body descends 12 m along the inclined plane in the next 4 s. Find the coefficients of static and magnetic friction between the surfaces in contact.
Solution:

Given

A body is kept on a horizontal rough plane. The plane is then gradually raised to an inclination of 30° with the horizontal and the body starts to slide down. The body descends 12 m along the inclined plane in the next 4 s.

In this case, the angle of repose = 30°.

∴ Coefficient of static friction, μ = tan30° = 1/√3 = 0.577

As the body begins to slide down, kinetic friction starts acting against the motion.

Downward acceleration, a = g(sinθ-μ’cosθ) [μ’ = coefficient of kinetic friction]

= \(9.8\left(\frac{1}{2}-\mu^{\prime} \frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\right)=9.8\left(0.5-0.866 \mu^{\prime}\right) \mathrm{m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-2}\)

As the body travels 12 m in 4 s from rest, from the equation, s = \(\frac{1}{20}\) at², we get,

12 = \(\frac{1}{2} a \cdot(4)^2 \quad \text { or, } a=\frac{3}{2}=1.5 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-2}\)

∴ \(9.8\left(0.5-0.866 \mu^{\prime}\right)=1.5\)

or, \(4.9-8.5 \mu^{\prime}=1.5 \quad \text { or, } \mu^{\prime}=\frac{3.4}{8.5}=0.4\)

Class 11 Physics Friction Notes

Example 2. To initiate an upward motion of a body along an inclined plane, the minimum force required is twice the force required to keep the body at rest on the same incline. If the coefficient of friction is μ, prove that the inclination of the plane is θ = tan-1 (3μ).
Solution:

Given

The minimum force required is twice the force required to keep the body at rest on the same incline. If the coefficient of friction is μ, prove that the inclination of the plane is θ = tan-1 (3μ).

Let the mass of the body be m, and the minimum force required to keep the body at rest on the inclined plane be F1.

In this case, the force of limiting friction f acts in the direction of the applied force.

∴ F1+f=mgsinθ

Friction Initiate An Upward Motion

or, F1 + μmg cosθ = mg sinθ or, F1 = mg(sinθ – μcosθ). If F2 is the minimum force needed to set the body in an upward motion, then limiting friction acts downwards.

∴ F2 = mg sinθ + f = mg sinθ + μmg cosθ

= mg(sinθ +μcosθ)….(1)

As F2 = 2F1 (given),

mg(sinθ + μcosθ) = 2mg(sinθ- μ cosθ) or, sinθ = 3 μ cosθ

or, tanθ = 3μ or, θ = tan-1(3μ) (Proved).

Applications of Friction in Daily Life

Example 3. A body of mass 5 x 10-3 kg is projected upwards along a plane inclined at an angle of 30° with the horizontal. If the time required by the body to move up the incline is half the time required for it to slide down, find the coefficient of friction between the surface and the body.
Solution:

Given

A body of mass 5 x 10-3 kg is projected upwards along a plane inclined at an angle of 30° with the horizontal. If the time required by the body to move up the incline is half the time required for it to slide down,

Let the mass of the body be m, and its upward acceleration be a1. Let the force of friction be f.

∴ ma1 = mg sinθ + f = mg sinθ + μmg cosθ

or, a1 = g(sinθ + μcosθ)

Friction Projected Upwards Along A Plane

If a2 is the acceleration during the downward motion, then, ma2 = mgsindθ – f = mgsinθ – μmgcosθ

or, a2 = g(sinθ-μcosθ)

Class 11 Physics Friction Notes

Friction Acceleration During Downward Motion

∴ \(\frac{a_1}{a_2}=\frac{\sin \theta+\mu \cos \theta}{\sin \theta-\mu \cos \theta}=\frac{\tan \theta+\mu}{\tan \theta-\mu}\)

If the displacement along the inclined plane is s, and the time taken to move up and to come down are t1 and t2 respectively, then,

s = \(\frac{1}{2} a_1 t_1^2=\frac{1}{2} a_2 t_2^2\)

∴ \(a_1=\frac{2 s}{t_1^2} \text { and } a_2=\frac{2 s}{t_2^2}\)

⇒ \(\frac{a_1}{a_2}=\frac{t_2^2}{t_1^2}=\left(\frac{t_2}{t_1}\right)^2=2^2=4 \quad\left[because t_1=\frac{t_2}{2}\right]\)

∴ \(\frac{\tan \theta+\mu}{\tan \theta-\mu}=4 \text { or, } \mu=\frac{3}{5} \tan \theta=0.6 \tan 30^{\circ}=0.346\)

Example 4. The upper half of an inclined surface is perfectly smooth but the lower half is rough. A body starts sliding down the plane and stops immediately upon reaching the bottom. The inclination of the plane is 30° with the horizontal. Show that the frictional resistance of the rough part of the surface is equal to the weight of the body.
Solution:

Given

The upper half of an inclined surface is perfectly smooth but the lower half is rough. A body starts sliding down the plane and stops immediately upon reaching the bottom. The inclination of the plane is 30° with the horizontal.

Class 11 Physics Friction Notes

Let the length of the inclined plane be 2l, and the vertical height from the ground be h.

Then we get, \(\sin 30^{\circ}=\frac{h}{2 l} \quad \text { or, } \frac{1}{2}=\frac{h}{2 l} \quad \text { or, } h=l \text {. }\)

The potential energy of the body of mass m at maximum height on the plane = mgh = mgl.

Friction Upper Half Of An Inclined Surface

The body comes to rest at the bottom. Hence, all its potential energy at the top is spent in doing work against the force of friction, which acts along the length of the lower half of the surface. If f is the frictional force, then f x l = mgl

or, f = mg = weight of the body (Proved).

Rolling Friction

So far we have discussed only the examples of motions where a body slides over a surface. Common examples are, pulling a chair on a floor, skiing on ice, pushing a book over a table, and so on.

  • A characteristic feature of this sliding motion is that the contact plane of the moving body remains unaltered. In other words, the force of friction acts on a particular surface of the sliding body all the time.
  • When a body rolls over a surface, the area of contact of the rolling body changes continuously with time. So, the frictional force does not act on any specific surface of the body.

Types Of Friction

Friction Rolling Friction

Consider the motion of a wheel over a horizontal plane. In this case the area of contact of the two surfaces at any time during the motion is very small.

  • When a rigid (or hard) wheel is placed on a horizontal plane, the plane of contact practically becomes a straight line, Now, let a horizontal force P be applied at the center C of the wheel.
  • It will initiate a translatory motion of the wheel, along the horizontal surface. Then, a frictional force F will act in the backward direction at the line of contact OA. As a result, the moment of F about C will generate a rotation of the wheel.
  • Line OA will be displaced, and new lines like O’B will come in contact with the horizontal surface. The overall effect is that two types of motion (translational and rotational) are set up in the wheel. Such composite motion of the wheel is called rolling.

Rolling Friction Definition: When a body translates, as well as rotates over a surface without slipping, its motion is known as rolling; the frictional force developed opposite to the direction of motion is called rolling friction.

  • We already know that sliding or kinetic friction is less than the limiting value of static friction (limiting friction). Rolling friction is much lower than even sliding friction. So it is considerably easier to overcome the rolling friction, and thus to set a body in motion.
  • This is how all-wheeled vehicles move. Wheels and tracks are always designed so that the applied force is greater than the rolling friction but less than the sliding friction. Car and bicycle tires have grooved surfaces that increase sliding friction.

If, for some reason, the sliding friction suddenly drops below the applied force, the wheel of the bicycle slides, or ‘skids’. Vehicles with wheels are not used at all where the sliding friction is very low—for example, flat-bottomed carts are used on ice surfaces.

Source Of Rolling Friction: When a wheel rolls on a surface, its motion gets obstructed due to deformation of the wheel, the surface, or both, at the plane of contact.

Types Of Friction

Friction Source Of Rolling Friction

  • In real life, usually, the and the ground are not perfectly rigid and both get deformed to some extent.
  • Such deformation is easily noticeable when a heavy wheel rolls over soft ground. At the point of contact of the wheel and the ground, an indentation is created on the surface due to the weight of the wheel. The ground just in front of the wheel swells up slightly.
  • At the point of contact, the wheel also gets deformed and a slight flattening is easily observed. These deformations at the point of contact are the source of rolling friction. When the air pressure is low in a cycle tube, the is flattened, and frictional force increases.
  • If both the surfaces in contact are rigid enough, then the deformation is negligible, and so the rolling friction is quite low. For this reason, the friction is considerably low in the case of a train running over a railway track.

Note that, the deformations of the surfaces in contact, in case of a rolling motion, are temporary. As soon as the point of contact shifts, the wheel and the surface regain their original shapes and the deformation shifts to a new point of contact.

Factors Affecting Friction

Difference Between Sliding Friction And Rolling Friction:

  1. The surface of contact remains unchanged in case of sliding friction while in case of rolling friction, the surface of contact keeps changing.
  2. In case of sliding friction, two surfaces in contact are in motion with respect to each other. In the case of rolling friction, there is no relative motion between the two surfaces in contact.
  3. The frictional force opposing the sliding motion (sliding friction) is much more than the force opposing the rolling motion (rolling friction).

Class 11 Physics Notes For Friction

Friction Conclusion

When two surfaces are in contact with each other, and there exists a relative motion between them, or an attempt is made to impart a relative motion, a force comes into play that resists the movement. This force is called the force of friction, or simply friction.

  • Force of friction is a self-adjusting force that balances the applied force as long as there is no relative motion in which case it is known as static friction.
  • The maximum possible magnitude of static friction is called limiting friction.
  • The force of limiting friction and kinetic friction, between two surfaces in contact, are directly proportional to the normal force.
  • When the normal force remains constant, friction between the two surfaces in contact is independent of the area of contact and the relative velocity between the surfaces.
  • The ratio between the force of limiting friction and the normal force is called the coefficient of static friction for two surfaces in contact. Again, the ratio between the kinetic friction and the normal force is the coefficient of kinetic friction.

The coefficient of friction (μ) does not have any unit; it is just a number. Usually, it is less than 1, but can be equal to or greater than 1 in special cases.

  • For a pair of surfaces in contact the resultant of the force of limiting friction and the normal force makes an angle with the normal force itself. That is called the angle of friction.
  • The maximum value of the angle of inclination of an inclined plane, for which an object is just on the verge of downward motion along the incline only due to its weight is called the angle of repose.
  • For the same system, the angle of friction is equal to the angle of repose.
  • When a body rolls over a surface without slipping, the frictional force developed at the point of contact, that opposes the rotation of the rolling body, is called rolling friction.

 Friction Useful Relations For Solving Numerical Examples

When R = normal force, f = limiting friction or sliding friction, and μ = coefficient of friction, f = μR,

Acceleration produced on a body of mass m, kept on a rough surface, by a force F applied along the surface, is a = \(\frac{F-\mu R}{m}\)

If a body of mass m remains in equilibrium on a plane, inclined at the angle of repose θ, then R = mg cosθ and f = μR= mg sinθ; hence, μ = tanθ.

If the angle of repose is θ and the angle of friction is λ then, μ = tanθ = tanλ

∴ θ = λ.

Resultant of the limiting friction and the normal force R between two surfaces in contact,

Q = \(R \sqrt{1+\mu^2}\)

Acceleration of a body moving over an incline, under the action of gravity is a = g(sinθ – μcosθ)

Friction Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. Can the value of the coefficient of friction be greater than 1?
Answer: Yes

Question 2. Does the force of friction depend on the area of contact?
Answer: No

Question 3. On what factors does the coefficient of static friction depend?
Answer:

  1. Nature of the surfaces in contact
  2. Nature of the material in contact

Question 4. What is wet friction?
Answer:

Wet friction

The force of friction between a solid and the layer of liquid

Question 5. Value of the angle of friction ______ on increasing the smoothness of the plane.
Answer: Decreases

Question 6. Rolling friction is _______ than both static friction and kinetic friction.
Answer: Less

Friction Assertion Reason Type Question And Answers

These questions have statement 1 and statement 2. Of the four choices given below, choose the one that best describes the two statements.

  1. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true; statement 2 is a correct explanation for statement 1.
  2. Statement 1 is true, and statement 2 is true; statement 2 is not a correct explanation for statement 1.
  3. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is false.
  4. Statement 1 is false, and statement 2 is true.

Question 1.

Statement 1: If a body tries to slip over a surface then friction acting on the body is necessarily equal to the limiting friction.

Statement 2: Static friction can be less than the limiting friction.

Answer: 4. Statement 1 is false, statement 2 is true

Question 2.

Statement 1: Frictional heat generated by the moving ski is the chief factor that promotes sliding in skiing and waxing the ski makes skiing easier.

Statement 2: Due to friction, energy dissipates in the form of heat. As a result, it melts the snow below it. Wax is water-repellent.

Answer: 1. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true; statement 2 is a correct explanation for statement 1.

Question 3.

Statement 1: The coefficient of friction can be greater than unity.

Statement 2: Frictional force depends on normal reaction and the ratio of force of friction and normal reaction cannot exceed unity.

Answer: 3. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is false.

Question 4.

Statement 1: Static frictional force is always greater than the kinetic frictional force.

Statement 2: Coefficient of static friction, μs > coefficient of kinetic friction, μk.

Answer: 4. Statement 1 is false, statement 2 is true

Question 5.

Statement 1: The driver of a moving car sees a wall in front of him. To avoid a collision, he should apply brakes rather than take a turn away from the wall.

Statement 2: Force of friction is needed to stop the car or take a turn on a horizontal road.

Answer: 2. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true; statement 2 is not a correct explanation for statement 1.

Question 6.

Statement 1: Friction opposes the motion of a body.

Statement 2: Static friction is self-adjusting while kinetic friction is constant.

Answer: 2. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true; statement 2 is not a correct explanation for statement 1.

Question 7.

Statement 1: A particle is thrown vertically upwards. If air resistance is taken into consideration then retardation in the upward journey is more than the acceleration in the downward journey.

Statement 2: Some mechanical energy is lost in the form of heat due to air friction.

Answer: 2. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true; statement 2 is not a correct explanation for statement 1.

Friction Match Column A With Column B

Question 1.

Friction Match The Columns Question 1

Answer: 1. B, 2. A, C, 3. B, 2. A, C

Short Answer Questions on Friction

Question 2. For the situation shown, in Column A, the statements regarding frictional forces are mentioned, while in Column B some information related to frictional forces is given.

Friction Force

Friction Match The Columns Question 2

Answer: 1. B, D, 2. C, 3. A, D, 4. C

Question 3. A body of mass 200 g is moving with a velocity of 5 m • s-1 along the positive x -x-direction. At time t = 0, when the body is at x = 0, a constant force of 0.4 N directed along the negative x-direction is applied to the body for 10 s.

Friction Match The Columns Question 3

Answer: 1. C, 2. A, 3. B, 4. D

Question 4. The coefficient of friction between the block and the surface is 0.4.

Friction Match The Columns Question 1 Coefficient Of Friction

Friction Match The Columns Question 4

Answer: 1. A, C, 2. B, D 3. A, B 4. C, D

Question 5. Both the pulleys are massless and frictionless. A force F (of any possible magnitude) is applied in the horizontal direction. There is no friction between M and the ground. μ1 and μ2 are the coefficients of friction as shown between the blocks. Column A gives the different relations between μ1 and μ2 and Column B is regarding the motion of M.

Friction Pulleys Are Massless And Friction less

Friction Match The Columns Question 5

Answer: 1. C, 2. C, 3. B, D, 4. A, D

Question 6. For the diagram shown, match the following columns.

Friction Absolute Acceleration

Friction Match The Column Question 6

Answer: 1. D, 2. A, 3. D

Real-Life Examples of Friction in Action

Question 7. A block of mass m is thrown upwards with some initial velocity as shown. On the block:

Friction Bloack Of Mass Is Thrown Upwards With Some Intial Velocity

Friction Match the Column Question 7

Answer: 1. C, 2. D, 3. B 4. A

 Friction Comprehension Type Question And Answers

Read the following passages carefully and answer the questions at the end of them.

Question 1. A man wants to slide down a block of mass m which is kept on a fixed inclined plane of inclination 30° as shown. Initially, the block is not sliding. To just start sliding the man pushes the block down the incline with a force F. Now, the block starts accelerating. To move it downwards with constant speed the man starts pulling the block with the same force. Surfaces are such that ratio of maximum static friction to kinetic friction is 2.

Friction A Man Wants To Slide Down A Block m

1. What is the value of F?

  1. \(\frac{m g}{4}\)
  2. \(\frac{m g}{6}\)
  3. \(\frac{m g \sqrt{3}}{4}\)
  4. \(\frac{m g}{2 \sqrt{3}}\)

Answer: 2. \(\frac{m g}{6}\)

2. What is the value of μs, friction?

  1. \(\frac{4}{3 \sqrt{3}}\)
  2. \(\frac{2}{3 \sqrt{3}}\)
  3. \(\frac{3}{3 \sqrt{3}}\)
  4. \(\frac{1}{2 \sqrt{3}}\)

Answer: 1. \(\frac{4}{3 \sqrt{3}}\)

3. If the man continues pushing the block by force F, its acceleration would be

  1. \(\frac{g}{6}\)
  2. \(\frac{g}{4}\)
  3. \(\frac{g}{2}\)
  4. \(\frac{g}{3}\)

Asnwer: 4. \(\frac{g}{3}\)

Question 2. A lift with a mass 1200 kg is raised from rest by a cable with a tension of 1350g N. After some time the tension drops to 1000g N and the lift comes to rest at a height of 25 m above its initial point. (1gN = 9.8 N).

1. What is the height at which the tension changes?

  1. 10.8 m
  2. 12.5 m
  3. 14.3 m
  4. 16 m

Answer: 3. 14.3 m

2. What is the greatest speed of the lift?

  1. 9.8 m s-1
  2. 7.5 m s-1
  3. 5.92 m s-1
  4. None Of These

Answer: 3. 5.92 m s-1

Question 3. A 6 kg block is kept on an inclined rough surface as shown. Based on this information answer the following questions (Take g = 10 m · s-2).

Friction A Block Is kept On An Inclined Rough Surface

1. The amount of force (F) required to keep the block stationary is

  1. 34N
  2. 40 N
  3. 35 N
  4. 36 N

Answer: 1. 34N

2. The amount of force (F) required to move the block downwards with constant velocity is

  1. 35 N
  2. 37 N
  3. 40 N
  4. 44 N

Answer: 3. 40 N

3. The amount of force (F) required to move the block upwards with an acceleration of 4 m • s-2 is

  1. 90 N
  2. 92 N
  3. 88 N
  4. 80 N

Answer: 3. 88 N

Friction Integer Answer Type Questions

In this type, the answer to each of the questions li a tingle digit Integer ranging from 0 to 9.

Question 1. A horizontal force of 10 N is necessary to just hold a block stationary against a wall. The coefficient of friction between the block and the wall is 0.2. What is the weight of the block (in N)?
Answer: 2

Question 2. The coefficient of friction between two blocks is μ = 0.6. The blocks are given velocities in the directions shown in the figure. Find the common velocity (in m • s-1) of the two blocks.
Answer: 4

Friction Coefficient Of Friction

 

 

 

WBCHSE Class 11 Physics Notes For Vectors

Kinematics Vector

Definition Of Scalar And Vector Quantities

Physical quantities, used in science and technology are broadly classified into two groups, scalar quantities and vector quantities.

Scalar Quantities Definition: A scalar quantity is a physical quantity having only magnitude but no direction.

Physical quantities like length, mass, time, relative density, energy, temperature, etc. are fully described by their magnitudes. These quantities do not have any direction. These are examples of scalar quantities.

Scalar Definition: Any number, that has a real magnitude only but no direction, is called a scalar.

Essentially, any real number—like 8, -2, √3, etc. is a scalar. Naturally, if an appropriate unit is added to a scalar, it becomes a scalar quantity.

Scalar Example:

  1. The distance of a railway station is 10 km from my residence.
  2. It takes me 30 minutes (time) to reach school from my home.

In all the above examples we can see that a scalar quantity is completely expressed by a real number and a unit and thus have complete information about the quantities.

Mathematical operations of scalars follow simple algebraic rules.

Read and Learn More: Class 11 Physics Notes

Vector Quantities Definition A vector quantity is defined as a physical quantity, having both magnitude and direction.

  • For physical quantities like displacement, velocity, acceleration, force, etc. the magnitude does not define the quantity fully. If we express the position of our school by saying that it is 4 km away from my residence then this statement is incomplete.
  • The school cannot be located until we say that it is 4 km west of my residence. Thus position is a vector quantity. A statement such as ‘the bus stop is 200 m from where one is standing’ may not be useful until a direction is specified, like 200 m east.

Vector Definition: Any number, that has a real magnitude as well as a direction, is called a vector.

WBCHSE Class 11 Physics Notes For Vectors

A vector quantity is expressed by a real number, a unit, and a specific direction.

Vector Example: Velocity of a particle = 10 m · s-1 towards the east. If the unit is omitted, we get a vector. In this example, the vector is ‘10 towards east’.

5 towards the south, -8 downwards, \(\frac{1}{2}\) along the north-west, 2√2 from the south-west, etc. are examples of vectors. Obviously, the vector ‘-8 downwards’ is identical to the vector ‘8 upwards’. If an appropriate unit is added to a vector, it becomes a vector quantity.

Differences Between Scalar And Vector Quantities:

Vector Differences between Scalar And Vector Quantities

It is to be noted that, scalars and vectors are mathematical elements only. After all mathematical operations, a proper unit must be added to the final result to obtain a meaningful physical quantity.

Geometrical Representation Of A Vector

A vector is represented by a line segment with an arrowhead. The length of the line segment (in a predetermined scale), is the magnitude of the vector and the arrowhead denotes the direction. The front end (carrying the arrow) is called the head and the rear end is called the tail.

The velocity of a particle 6 cm • s-1 towards the east is represented by the line segment AB. If the scale is chosen such that CD =0.5 in. represents 2cm · s-1, then the length of the segment AB should be 1.5 in.

Vector Geometrical Representation Of A Vector

So, the 1.5 in. long line segment AB with the arrowhead pointing towards the east represents both the magnitude and direction (towards the east) of the velocity of the particle. The velocity vector is represented as \(\overrightarrow{A B}\), where A is the initial point and B is the terminal point.

Generally, a vector is expressed as an algebraic quantity by using a letter with an arrowhead like \(\vec{a}, \vec{b}, \vec{c},\), etc. The magnitude or absolute value of a vector is a scalar and is always positive. It is called the modulus of the vector. It is expressed as a, b, c (without an arrow) or \(|\vec{a}|,|\vec{b}|,|\vec{c}|\).

Modulus of the velocity vector \(\overrightarrow{A B}\), as shown.

Therefore, \(|\stackrel{\rightharpoonup}{\nu}|=|\overrightarrow{A B}|=A B \text { (length) }=6 \mathrm{~cm} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

Some Facts About Vectors

Equal Vectors: Two vectors, equal in magnitude as well as in direction, are called equal vectors. \(\overrightarrow{A B}\) and \(\overrightarrow{C D}\) are equal vectors as both have the same magnitude (length) and direction.

If \(\overrightarrow{A B}\) represents 20 towards the north, then \(\overrightarrow{C D}\) will also represent 20 towards the north. If \(\overrightarrow{A B}\) = \(\vec{a}\), then \(\overrightarrow{C D}\) is also = \(\vec{a}\), i.e., \(\overrightarrow{A B}\) = \(\overrightarrow{C D}\).

Equal Vectors

Two vectors may be equal even when their initial and final points are not the same. This means that we can translate a vector keeping its magnitude and direction unchanged.

Opposite Vectors: Two vectors having the same absolute value but opposite directions are called opposite vectors. \(\overrightarrow{F E}\) and \(\overrightarrow{A B}\) or \(\overrightarrow{C D}\) are opposite vectors.

∴ \(\overrightarrow{F E}\) represents a vector with a magnitude same as that of \(\overrightarrow{A B}\) or \(\overrightarrow{C D}\) = a (say), but the direction of \(\overrightarrow{F E}\) is opposite to that of \(\overrightarrow{A B}\) or \(\overrightarrow{C D}\).

Hence, if \(\overrightarrow{A B}\) = \(\overrightarrow{C D}\) = \(\vec{a}\), then \(\overrightarrow{F E}\) = –\(\vec{a}\). It may also be written as \(\overrightarrow{A B}\) = \(\overrightarrow{C D}\) = –\(\overrightarrow{F E}\).

As magnitudes or moduli of two opposite vectors are the same, we have, \(|\vec{a}|=a,|-\vec{a}|=a\).

Collinear Vectors: Vectors that are of the same or different magnitudes, but jure parallel or anti-parallel to one another, are known as collinear vectors. \(\vec{d}, \vec{e}, \vec{f}\) are collinear vectors. Also \(\vec{x}, \vec{y}, \vec{z}\) acting along the same line, represent a set of collinear vectors.

Collinear Vectors

Coplanar Vectors: Vectors lying on the same plane are coplanar vectors. \(\vec{a}\) and –\(\vec{a}\) and all vectors lie on the plane of the paper and hence are coplanar.

Unit Vector: A vector in the direction of a given vector with unit magnitude is called a unit vector. A unit vector is often denoted by a lowercase letter with circumflex or ‘hat’ (^).

The absolute value of any vector is a scalar. This scalar, multiplied by the unit vector in that direction, gives the corresponding vector.

Class 11 Physics Class 12 Maths Class 11 Chemistry
NEET Foundation Class 12 Physics NEET Physics

Unit Vector Example: \(|\vec{A}|\) = A and \(A \hat{n}=\vec{A}\) where \(\hat{n}\) is the unit vector in the direction of \(\vec{A}\). This means \(\frac{\vec{A}}{A}=\hat{n}\).

Therefore a vector divided by its magnitude gives the unit vector in the direction of that vector. In the cartesian coordinate system, unit vectors along x, y, and z axes are conventionally represented as \(\hat{i}, \hat{j} \text { and } \hat{k}\) respectively.

Composition Of Scalars And Vectors

Scalars have only magnitudes. So addition or subtraction of scalars means the addition or subtraction of their magnitudes only. Accordingly, scalar addition follows simple algebraic rules.

Vectors have both magnitude and direction. Therefore, during addition or subtraction of vectors, their directions should be taken into account as well. Thus, they cannot be added or subtracted by using simple algebraic rules. Hence, the geometrical method or analytical method of vector algebra is used for vector addition.

Addition Or Two Vectors

Suppose a particle starting from its initial position O undergoes \(\vec{a}\) displacement a and reaches point A. Hence, \(\vec{a}\) = \(\overrightarrow{O A}\). After a further displacement of \(\vec{b}\) in a  different direction, the particle reaches point B.

Hence, \(\vec{a}\) = \(\overrightarrow{A B}\). Starting from point O, the net displacement of the particle is thus \(\overrightarrow{O B}\) = \(\vec{c}\) (say).

Vector \(\vec{c}\) is called the sum or the resultant of \(\vec{a}\) and \(\vec{b}\), expressed as \(\vec{c}\) = \(\vec{a}\) + \(\vec{b}\).

This sum will obviously be a vector sum, because by adding only the magnitudes of \(\vec{a}\) and \(\vec{b}\), \(\vec{c}\) cannot be found. The magnitudes of \(\vec{a}\), \(\vec{b}\) and \(\vec{c}\) can be determined from the lengths of the sides OA, AB and OB respectively.

This method of finding the resultant of two displacements also holds good for finding the sum of any two vectors. Illustrates one such case where forces \(\vec{P}\) and \(\vec{Q}\) pull a boat simultaneously. As a result, the boat moves along the resultant \(\vec{R}\), and \(\vec{P}\) + \(\vec{Q}\) = \(\vec{R}\).

Addition Of Two Vectors

Addition Of Two Vectors Resultant: A single vector, which represents the result of the summation of a number of vectors both in magnitude and in direction, is called the resultant of those vectors.

∴ \(\overrightarrow{O B}\) is the resultant.

To find the sum of \(\vec{P}\) and \(\vec{Q}\), draw the vectors \(\vec{P}\) as shown and name it as AB i.e., \(\overrightarrow{A B}\) = \(\vec{P}\).

Vector Mgnitufre Of The Resultants Of Two Vectors

Now move the vector \(\vec{Q}\) parallel to itself such that its tail coincides with the tip B of the vector \(\vec{P}\).

Mark the tip of the vector \(\vec{Q}\) as C i.e., \(\overrightarrow{B C}\) = \(\vec{Q}\). Join the tail of the vector \(\vec{P}\) to the tip of the vector \(\vec{Q}\) i.e., \(\overrightarrow{A C}\) = \(\vec{R}\) where \(\vec{Q}\) represents the sum of the vectors \(\vec{P}\) and \(\vec{Q}\). Thus, \(\vec{R}\) = \(\vec{P}\) + \(\vec{Q}\).

Vector addition follows either of the following equivalent laws:

  1. Law of triangle of vectors,
  2. Law of parallelogram of vectors and
  3. Polygon law of vectors.

Magnitude In vector Addition: Let us consider two vectors a and b whose resultant is found to be \(\vec{c}\) i.e., \(\vec{a}\) + \(\vec{b}\) = \(\vec{c}\). Now to think, that the magnitude of \(\vec{c}\) is actually the sum of the magnitude of \(\vec{a}\) and magnitude of \(\vec{b}\) is incorrect. This is because we can see that \(|\vec{c}|<|\vec{a}|+|\vec{b}|\).

Vector Magnitude In Vector Addition

It means that the magnitude of resultant vector \(\vec{c}\) not only depends on the magnitude of \(\vec{c}\) and \(\vec{c}\) but also depends on the angle between the two vectors \(\vec{a}\) and \(\vec{b}\).

To find out the relationship between \(\vec{a}\), \(\vec{b}\), \(\vec{c}\) and the angle between the vectors, let us study the following law of vector addition.

Law Of Triangle Of Vectors

Law Of Triangle Of Vectors Geometrical Method: \(\vec{a}\) + \(\vec{b}\) = \(\vec{c}\) or \(\overrightarrow{O A}+\overrightarrow{A B}=\overrightarrow{O B}\). Vectors \(\overrightarrow{O A}, \overrightarrow{A B} \) and their resultant \(\overrightarrow{O B}\), therefore represent the three sides of the A OAB. The following triangle law of vector addition can be obtained by considering the magnitudes and directions of the vectors.

Law Of Triangle Of Vectors Geometrical Method Statement: When the magnitudes and directions of two vectors, are represented by two adjacent sides of a triangle taken in order, the third side taken in the opposite order, represents the magnitude and direction of the resultant of the two vectors.

Two adjacent sides taken in order and the third side taken in the opposite order—means that if the former is in a clockwise direction in the triangle, the third side, representing the resultant, should be in an anticlockwise direction.

Law Of Triangle Of Vectors Geometrical Method Corollary: With reference to the A OAB, \(\overrightarrow{O A}+\overrightarrow{A B}=\overrightarrow{O B}\) or, \(\overrightarrow{O A}+\overrightarrow{A B}-\overrightarrow{O B}=0\)

or, \(\overrightarrow{O A}+\overrightarrow{A B}+\overrightarrow{B O}=0\)

Hence, if three vectors are completely represented by the three sides of a triangle taken in order (all clockwise or all anticlockwise), then the resultant of the vectors will be zero.

Vector Parallelogram Of Vector

Law Of Triangle Of Vectors Analytical Method: Let the two vectors \(\vec{a}\) and \(\vec{b}\) be represented both in magnitude and direction by the sides \(\overrightarrow{O A}\) and \(\overrightarrow{A B}\) of ΔOAB is taken in the same order. Then according to the triangle law of vector addition, the resultant \(\vec{c}\) is given by the side OB taken in the reverse order, as shown.

Law Of Triangle Of Vectors Analytical Method Magnitude Of The Resultant \(\vec{c}\): BE is the perpendicular drawn from B on the extension of OA. The angle between the vectors \(\vec{a}\) and \(\vec{b}\), ∠BAE = α. It is to be noted that to measure the angle between two vectors, their initial points are superimposed on each other without changing the directions of the vectors.

Now from right-angled ΔAEB we have \(BE \frac{B E}{A B}=\sin \alpha\)

or, \(B E=A B \sin \alpha\)

or, \(B E=b \sin \alpha\) and \(\frac{A E}{A B}=\cos \alpha\) or, \(A E=A B \cos \alpha\)

or, \(A E=b \cos \alpha\)

Applying Pythagoras theorem in right-angled ΔOEB we get, \((O B)^2=(O E)^2+(E B)^2=(O A+A E)^2+(E B)^2\)

or, \(c^2=(a+b \cos \alpha)^2+(b \sin \alpha)^2\)

= \(a^2+2 a b \cos \alpha+b^2 \cos ^2 \alpha+b^2 \sin ^2 \alpha\)

or, \(c^2=a^2+2 a b \cos \alpha+b^2\left(\cos ^2 \alpha+\sin ^2 \alpha\right)\)

or, \(c^2=a^2+b^2+2 a b \cos \alpha\) (because \(\cos ^2 \alpha+\sin ^2 \alpha=1\))

or \(c=\sqrt{a^2+b^2+2 a b \cos \alpha}\)….(1)

WBBSE Class 11 Acceleration Due to Gravity Variations Notes

Law Of Triangle Of Vectors Analytical Method Direction Of The Resultant \(\vec{c}\): Let the resultant vector (\(\vec{c}\)) make an angle α with the first vector \(\vec{a}\). Then from right-angled ΔOEB, we get, \(\tan \theta=\frac{B E}{O E}=\frac{B E}{O A+A E}\)

or, \(\tan \theta=\frac{b \sin \alpha}{a+b \cos \alpha}\)….(2)

Therefore, if the magnitudes a and b, and the value of the angle α are known, then from equations (1) and (2), the magnitude of the resultant vector and its direction can be determined.

Law Of Parallelogram Of Vectors

Law Of Parallelogram Of Vectors Geometrical Method: The law of parallelogram of vector addition is just an alternative form of the law of triangle of vector addition. let \(\overrightarrow{O A}=\vec{a}\) and \(\overrightarrow{A B}=\vec{b}\).

Therefore, from the triangle law of vector addition, the vector \(\overrightarrow{O B}\) represents the magnitude and direction of the resultant \(\vec{c}\). Hence, \(\vec{a}+\vec{b}=\vec{c}\) or, \(\overrightarrow{O A}+\overrightarrow{A B}=\overrightarrow{O B}.\)

Now the parallelogram OABD is completed. AB and OD being the opposite sides of the parallelogram, are equal and parallel.

Hence, \(\overrightarrow{A B}=\overrightarrow{O D}=\vec{b}\).

So, \(\overrightarrow{O A}+\overrightarrow{O D}=\overrightarrow{O B}\)

Law Of Parallelogram Of Vectors Geometrical Method Statement: If the magnitudes and directions of two vectors are represented by two adjacent sides of a parallelogram, the diagonal drawn from the point of origin of the two vectors represents the magnitude and direction of the resultant.

Law Of Parallelogram Of Vectors Analytical Method:

Law Of Parallelogram Of Vectors Analytical Method Magnitude Of Resultant \(\vec{c}\): Let the point of origin of the vectors \(\vec{a}\) and \(\vec{b}\) be O. The two vectors are represented by the line segments OA and OD.

The parallelogram OABD is completed by drawing DB parallel to OA and AB parallel to OD. Then the diagonal OB from point 0 represents the magnitude and direction is the resultant of the vectors \(\vec{a}\) and \(\vec{b}\).

Here, \(\vec{a}=\overrightarrow{O A}, \vec{b}=\overrightarrow{O D}=\overrightarrow{A B} \text { and } \vec{c}=\overrightarrow{O B}\)

Perpendicular BE is drawn from B on the extension of OA. Then ∠BAE = ∠DOA = α

Here, the length of the side OA = \(|\vec{a}|\) = a

length of the side OD = length of the side AB = \(|\vec{b}|\) = b and length of the side OB = \(|\vec{c}|\) = c

From right angled ΔBAE we have, \(\frac{B E}{A B}=\sin \alpha\) or, BE = \(A B \sin \alpha\)

∴ BE = \(b \sin \alpha\)

Again, \(\frac{A E}{A B}=\cos \alpha\) or, \(A E=A B \cos \alpha\)

∴ AE = \(b \cos \alpha\)

Using Pythagoras theorem in right-angled ΔOEB, we get, \((O B)^2=(O E)^2+(B E)^2=(O A+A E)^2+(B E)^2\)

or, \(c^2=(a+b \cos \alpha)^2+(b \sin \alpha)^2\)

or, \(c^2=a^2+b^2 \cos ^2 \alpha+2 a b \cos \alpha+b^2 \sin ^2 \alpha\)

= \(a^2+b^2\left(\cos ^2 \alpha+\sin ^2 \alpha\right)+2 a b \cos \alpha\)

∴ \(c^2=a^2+b^2+2 a b \cos \alpha\) (because \(\cos ^2 \alpha+\sin ^2 \alpha=1\))

or, c = \(\sqrt{a^2+b^2+2 a b \cos \alpha}\)…….(1)

Law Of Parallelogram Of Vectors Analytical Method Direction Of Resultant \(\vec{c}\): Let the resultant \(\vec{c}\) make an angle θ with the direction of \(\vec{a}\). Then from right-angled ΔOEB, we get,

tanθ= \(\frac{B E}{O E}=\frac{B E}{O A+A E} \text { or, } \tan \theta=\frac{b \sin \alpha}{a+b \cos \alpha}\)…..(2)

Equations (1) and (2) are identical to those in the previous section.

It may be noted that two vectors and their resultant are always confined on a plane. This is not the case for three or more vectors and their resultant. The vectors and their resultant are, in general, distributed in 3-dimensional space.

Some Special Cases Of Addition Of Two Vectors

1. Two Parallel Vectors (α = 0): In this case, sinα = 0 and cosα = 1. Thus from equation (1), we can write,

c = \(\sqrt{a^2+b^2+2 a b}=\sqrt{(a+b)^2}=(a+b)\)

From equation (2), we can conclude that tanθ = 0, or, θ = 0°.

Hence, the magnitude of the resultant is the sum of the magnitudes of the vectors and it is directed along the vectors. It is simply a scalar addition.

2. Two anti-parallel vectors (α = 180°): In this case, sinα = 0 and cosα = -1.

Therefore, from equation (1), we get, c = \(\sqrt{a^2+b^2-2 a b}=\sqrt{(a-b)^2}\) or, \(c=|a-b|\) and from equation (2), tanθ = 0 or, θ = 0° when a > b or θ= 180° when b> a.

Hence, the magnitude of the resultant is the difference in the magnitudes of the vectors and its direction is along the larger vector. It is also a simple scalar operation.

3. Two Equal And Anti-Parallel Vectors (a = b and α = 180°): In this case sinα = 0 and cosα = -1.

Hence, using equation (1), c = \(\sqrt{a^2+a^2+2 a^2 \cos 180^{\circ}}=\sqrt{2 a^2-2 a^2}=0\)

Therefore, the magnitude of the resultant is zero. It is essentially a null vector.

4. Two Orthogonal (Perpendicular To Each Other) Vectors (α = 90°): In this case, sinα = 1 and cosα= 0

∴ From equation (1) and (2), c = \(\sqrt{a^2+b^2+2 a b \cos 90^{\circ}}=\sqrt{a^2+b^2}\) and \(\tan \theta=\frac{b}{a}\)

Therefore, we can conclude that,

  1. The maximum possible value of the resultant = sum of magnitudes of the vectors i.e., c(max) = a + b
  2. The minimum possible value of the resultant = difference of magnitudes of the vectors i.e., c (min) = |a- b|
  3. If the vectors are equal in magnitude and anti-parallel, then the resultant will be 0.

Properties Of Vector Addition (Commutative And Associative Rules)

Properties Of Vector Addition Commutative Rule: Vector addition is commutative. If \(\vec{a}\) and \(\vec{b}\) are two vectors, then by this rule, \(\vec{a}+\vec{b}=\vec{b}+\vec{a}\). This means that vectors can be added in any order.

Vector Properties Of Vector Addition

Properties Of Vector Addition Commutative Rule Proof: OA and OC representing two vectors are two adjacent arms of the parallelogram OABC.

Here, \(\vec{a}=\overrightarrow{O A}=\overrightarrow{C B}\) and \(\vec{b}=\overrightarrow{O C}=\overrightarrow{A B}\)

So, \(\vec{a}+\vec{b}=\overrightarrow{O A}+\overrightarrow{A B}=\overrightarrow{O B}=\vec{c}\), (as per the triangle law of addition of vectors).

Again, \(\vec{b}+\vec{a}=\overrightarrow{O C}+\overrightarrow{C B}=\overrightarrow{O B}=\vec{c}\)

Hence, \(\vec{a}+\vec{b}=\vec{b}+\vec{a}\) or in other words, vector sum is commutative.

Properties Of Vector Addition Associative Rule: Vector addition is associative. To add any three vectors, the addition may be initiated with any two of the vectors. Mathematically, \((\vec{a}+\vec{b})+\vec{c}=\vec{a}+(\vec{b}+\vec{c})\), where \(\vec{a}\), \(\vec{b}\) and \(\vec{c}\) are the given vectors. This rule holds good for the addition of more than three vectors as well.

Properties Of Vector Addition Associative Rule Associative Rule Proof: Let \(\vec{a}\), \(\vec{b}\) and \(\vec{c}\) be represented by the three arms OA, AB and BC of the quadrilateral OABC.

As shown, \(\vec{a}+\vec{b}=\overrightarrow{O A}+\overrightarrow{A B}=\overrightarrow{O B}\) and \(\overrightarrow{O B}+\overrightarrow{B C}=(\vec{a}+\vec{b})+\vec{c}=\overrightarrow{O C}\)

Again, as per figure, \(\vec{b}+\vec{c}=\overrightarrow{A B}+\overrightarrow{B C}=\overrightarrow{A C}\)

∴ \(\vec{a}+(\vec{b}+\vec{c})=\overrightarrow{O A}+\overrightarrow{A C}=\overrightarrow{O C}\)

Hence, \(\vec{a}+(\vec{b}+\vec{c})=(\vec{a}+\vec{b})+\vec{c}\)

Vector Scalar Addition

Itis noted that scalar addition also follows these two rules.

Law Of Polygon Of Vectors: Addition Of Three Or More Vectors: The sum (resultant) of two vectors can be determined by the law of triangle for vector addition. If the number of vectors is three or more, then by applying the law of triangle successively the law of polygon of vectors is derived. By the application of the law of polygon of vectors, the addition of any number of vectors is possible.

Suppose the resultant of four vectors \(\vec{a}, \vec{b}, \vec{c} \text { and } \vec{d}\) is to be determined. For this, vector \(\overrightarrow{O A}\) equal to \(\vec{a}\) is drawn from any point O.

Now taking A as the initial point, \(\overrightarrow{A B}\) equal to \(\vec{b}\) is drawn. Similarly, \(\overrightarrow{B C}\) equal to \(\vec{c}\) and \(\overrightarrow{C D}\) equal to \(\vec{d}\) are drawn one after another.

Then, the vector \(\overrightarrow{O D}\) drawn by joining the initial point O of the first vector and the terminal point D of the last vector represents the resultant of the vectors \(\vec{a}, \vec{b}, \vec{c} \text { and } \vec{d}\).

∴ \(\overrightarrow{O D}=\vec{R}=\vec{a}+\vec{b}+\vec{c}+\vec{d}=\overrightarrow{O A}+\overrightarrow{A B}+\overrightarrow{B C}+\overrightarrow{C D}\)

Vector Law Of Polygon Of Vectors

This is called the law of polygon of vectors and with this law, the resultant of any number of vectors can be determined.

Understanding Variation of Gravity with Height

Laws Of Polygon Of Vectors Statement: If the magnitudes and directions of a number of vectors are represented by the sides of a closed polygon, taken in order, then the last side of the polygon, taken in the opposite order, represents the magnitude and direction of the resultant of the vectors.

The coplanarity of the vectors is not necessary for the validity of polygon law. Vectors can be added by using the polygon law irrespective of their number and sequence.

Proof Of The Law Of Polygon Of Vectors: Let the magnitudes and directions of the vectors \(\vec{a}, \vec{b}, \vec{c}, \vec{d}\) be represented, by the arms of the polygon OABCD, taken in order: \(\overrightarrow{O A}, \overrightarrow{A B}, \overrightarrow{B C}, \overrightarrow{C D}\).

From Triangle Law,

In triangle OAB, \(\overrightarrow{O B}=\overrightarrow{O A}+\overrightarrow{A B}\),

In triangle OBC, \(\overrightarrow{O C}=\overrightarrow{O B}+\overrightarrow{B C}=\overrightarrow{O A}+\overrightarrow{A B}+\overrightarrow{B C}\) and

In triangle OCD, \(\overrightarrow{O D}=\overrightarrow{O C}+\overrightarrow{C D}=\overrightarrow{O A}+\overrightarrow{A B}+\overrightarrow{B C}+\overrightarrow{C D}\)

∴ \(\overrightarrow{O D}\)=\(\vec{R}=\overrightarrow{O A}+\overrightarrow{A B}+\overrightarrow{B C}+\overrightarrow{C D}\)=\(\vec{a}+\vec{b}+\vec{c}+\vec{d}\)

Hence, \(\overrightarrow{O D}\) is the resultant of the vectors \(\vec{a}, \vec{b}, \vec{c}\) and \(\vec{d}\). The arm \(\overrightarrow{O D}\) is the remaining arm of the polygon taken in the opposite order. This proves the law and also shows that it is nothing but an extension of the law of triangle of vector addition.

Polygon Of Vector Corollary: In the pentagon OABCD, \(\overrightarrow{O A}+\overrightarrow{A B}+\overrightarrow{B C}+\overrightarrow{C D}=\overrightarrow{O D}\)

or, \(\overrightarrow{O A}+\overrightarrow{A B}+\overrightarrow{B C}+\overrightarrow{C D}-\overrightarrow{O D}=0\)

or, \(\overrightarrow{O A}+\overrightarrow{A B}+\overrightarrow{B C}+\overrightarrow{C D}+\overrightarrow{D O}=0\)

In other words, if three or more vectors can be represented by the sides of a closed polygon, taken in order, the resultant of the vectors must be zero.

The physical quantities that have both magnitude and direction and obey all the laws of vector addition such as

  1. Triangle law of vectors,
  2. Parallelogram law of vectors and
  3. The Polygon law of vectors are called vector quantities.

Unit 2 Chapter 2 Vector

Polygon Of Vectors Numerical Examples

Example 1. If \(\vec{a}+\vec{b}=\vec{c}\) and a + b = c, find the angle between \(\vec{a}\) and \(\vec{b}\).
Solution:

Let the angle between \(\vec{a}\) and \(\vec{b}\) be

Here, \(\vec{a}+\vec{b}=\vec{c}\) = \(\vec{c}\)

∴ c² = a² + b² + 2 ab cosα……..(1)

Again, a+b=c or, a² + b²+ 2ab = c²……(2)

Hence from (1) and (2), a² + b² + 2ab = a² + b² + 2ab cosα

or, 2ab = 2ab cosα or, cosα = 1 = cos0°

∴ α = 0°

Example 2. Can the magnitude of the resultant of two equal vectors be equal to the magnitude of each of the vectors? Explain.
Solution:

Let the magnitude of each vector and of the resultant be a and the angle between the vectors be α.

Hence, a² = a² + a² + 2a · a cosα

or, a² = 2a²(1+ cosα) or, 2(1 + cosα) = 1

or, cosα = \(\frac{1}{2}\) – 1 = –\(\frac{1}{2}\) = cos 120°

∴ α = 120°

Hence, the magnitude of the resultant of two equal vectors is equal to that of each of the given vectors when they are inclined at an angle of 120° with each other.

Example 3. 2P and P are two vectors inclined to each other at such an angle that if the 1st vector is doubled, the value of the resultant becomes three times. What is the angle between the two vectors?
Solution:

Let the initial resultant be R and the angle between the two vectors 2 P and P be α.

∴ \(R^2=(2 P)^2+P^2+2 \cdot 2 P \cdot P \cos \alpha\)

or, \(R^2=5 P^2+4 P^2 \cos \alpha\)…..(1)

In the second case, 1st vector =2 P x 2 = 4P and resultant = 3R

or, \((3 R)^2=(4 P)^2+P^2+2.4 P \cdot P \cos \alpha\)

or, \(9 R^2=17 P^2+8 P^2 \cos \alpha\)

or, \(R^2=\frac{17}{9} P^2+\frac{8}{9} P^2 \cos \alpha\)…..(2)

From (1) and (2), \(5 P^2+4 P^2 \cos \alpha=\frac{17}{9} P^2+\frac{8}{9} P^2 \cos \alpha\)

or, \(\left(4-\frac{8}{9}\right) \cos \alpha=\frac{17}{9}-5\)

or, \(\frac{28}{9} \cos \alpha=-\frac{28}{9}\)

or, \(\cos \alpha=-1=\cos 180^{\circ}\)

∴ \(\alpha=180^{\circ}\)

Short Answer Questions on Gravity Variation Concepts

Example 4. Using vectors, prove that the line joining the midpoints of two sides of a triangle is parallel to the base and half its length.
Solution:

From the triangle law of vector addition in ΔABC, \(\overrightarrow{A B}+\overrightarrow{B C}=\overrightarrow{A C}\)

or, \(\frac{1}{2} \overrightarrow{A B}+\frac{1}{2} \overrightarrow{B C}=\frac{1}{2} \overrightarrow{A C}\)…..(1)

As D and E are the mid-points of sides AB and AC, \(\overrightarrow{A D}\)=\(\frac{1}{2} \overrightarrow{A B}\) and \(\overrightarrow{A E}=\frac{1}{2} \overrightarrow{A C}\)

Vector Ling Joining Of Two Sides Of A Triangle

From the triangle law of vector addition in ΔADE \(\overrightarrow{A D}+\overrightarrow{D E}\)=\(\overrightarrow{A E}\)

or, \(\frac{1}{2} \overrightarrow{A B}+\overrightarrow{D E}=\frac{1}{2} \overrightarrow{A C}\)……(2)

From (1) and (2), \(\overrightarrow{D E}=\frac{1}{2} \overrightarrow{B C}\)

Hence, \(\overrightarrow{D E}\) and \(\overrightarrow{B C}\) are parallel and DE = \(\frac{1}{2}\)BC.

Example 5. When will the magnitude of the resultant of two equal vectors be

  1. √2 times and
  2. √3 times the magnitude of each of them?

Solution:

Let the value of each vector be a and the angle between the two vectors be α.

1. In this case, the magnitude of the resultant =√2a

∴ (√2a)² = a² + a² + 2a · acosα

or, 2a² cosα = 0 or, cosα = 0 = cos 90°

∴ α = 90°

Hence, the angle between the two vectors will be 90°.

2. In this case, the magnitude of the resultant = √3a

∴ (√3a)² = a² + a²+ 2a · acosα

or, 2a² cosα = a² or, cosα = 1/2 = cos 60°

∴ α = 60°

The angle between the two vectors will be 60°.

Example 6. The maximum and the minimum values of the resul¬tant of two forces are 15 N and 7 N respectively. If the magnitude of each force is increased by 1 N and these new forces act at an angle of 90° to each other, find the magnitude and direction of their resultant.
Solution:

Let the magnitudes of the two forces be P and Q.

As per given condition, P + Q = 15 N…..(1)

and P-Q = 7N……(2)

By solving (1) and (2), we get, P = 11 N and Q = 4 N.

Vector Maxiumum And Minimum Values Of Resultant

When each of the two forces is increased by 1 N in magnitude, the new magnitudes are P= (11 + 1) = 12 N and Q = (4 + 1) = 5 N and since the angle between these new forces is 90°, new resultant = \(\sqrt{12^2+5^2}=13 \mathrm{~N}\)

Let the angle of inclination of the resultant with the force 12 N be d.

Then, tanθ = \(\frac{5}{12}\) or, d = tan-1 \(\frac{5}{12}\)

∴ The magnitude of the resultant is 13 N and it is inclined with the force 12 N at an angle tan \(\frac{5}{12}\).

Example 7. The resultant \(\vec{R}\) of two vectors has a magnitude equal to one of the vectors and is at a right angle to it. Find the value of the other vector.
Solution:

Let Q be the value of the other vector.

Vector Resultant Of Two Vectors

R² + R² = Q² or, Q² = 2 R²

∴ Q = √2R

Example 8. The maximum magnitude of the resultant of two vectors, \(\vec{P}\) and \(\vec{Q}\)(where P> Q) is x times the minimum magnitude of the resultant When the angle between \(\vec{P}\) and \(\vec{Q}\) is θ, the magnitude of the resultant Is equal to half the sum of the magnitudes of the two vectors. Prove that, \(\cos \theta=\frac{x^2+2}{2\left(1-x^2\right)}\).
Solution:

P+Q=x(P-Q) (given) or, Q = \(\frac{x-1}{x+1} \cdot P\)

If R is the resultant of the two vectors when the angle between them is θ, then \(R^2=P^2+Q^2+2 P Q \cos \theta\)…..(1)

Given, \(R=\frac{P+Q}{2}=\frac{P+\frac{x-1}{x+1} \cdot P}{2}=\frac{x P}{x+1}\)

Putting in (1),

∴ \(\frac{x^2 P^2}{(x+1)^2}=P^2+\frac{(x-1)^2}{(x+1)^2} P^2+2 P^2\left(\frac{x-1}{x+1}\right) \cos \theta\)

or, \(\frac{x^2}{(x+1)^2}=1+\frac{(x-1)^2}{(x+1)^2}+\frac{2(x-1)}{x+1} \cos \theta\)

or, \(\frac{-\left(x^2+2\right)}{(x+1)^2}=\frac{2(x-1)}{(x+1)} \cos \theta\)

or, \(\cos \theta=\frac{-\left(x^2+2\right)}{2\left(x^2-1\right)}=\frac{x^2+2}{2\left(1-x^2\right)}\)

Example 9. Out of two vectors, the larger one is √2 times the smaller one. Show that the resultant cannot make an angle greater than π/4 with the larger one.
Solution:

Let the two vectors be √2Q and Q and the resultant be R. Angle between R and √2 Q is θ and ∠ADB = α.

From ΔABD, \(\frac{A B}{\sin \angle A D B}=\frac{B D}{\sin \angle D A B} \text { or, } \frac{\sqrt{2} Q}{\sin \alpha}=\frac{Q}{\sin \theta}\)

Vector Out Of Two Vectors

or, \(\sin \theta=\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}} \sin \alpha\)

∴ sinα 1, sinθ  \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)

Hence, θ \(\frac{\pi}{4}\)

Example 10. Show that If three forces are represented by the three medians of a triangle, they will be In equilibrium.
Solution:

Let the medians of the A ABC be \(\overrightarrow{A D}, \overrightarrow{B E} \text { and } \overrightarrow{C F}\). Vectors AD, BE and CF represent the three forces.

We have to show: \(\overrightarrow{A D}+\overrightarrow{B E}+\overrightarrow{C F}=\overrightarrow{0} \text {. }\)

Vector Three Medians Of A Triangle

As per triangle law of vector addition, \(\overrightarrow{A D}=\overrightarrow{A C}+\overrightarrow{C D}=\overrightarrow{A C}+\frac{1}{2} \overrightarrow{C B}\)

⇒ \(\overrightarrow{B E}=\overrightarrow{B A}+\overrightarrow{A E}=\overrightarrow{B A}+\frac{1}{2} \overrightarrow{A C}\)

⇒ \(\overrightarrow{C F}=\overrightarrow{C B}+\overrightarrow{B F}=\overrightarrow{C B}+\frac{1}{2} \overrightarrow{B A}\)

Hence, \(\overrightarrow{A D}+\overrightarrow{B E}+\overrightarrow{C F}=\frac{3}{2}(\overrightarrow{A C}+\overrightarrow{C B}+\overrightarrow{B A})=\overrightarrow{0}\)

[as the sum of 3 vectors, represented by the 3 sides of a triangle taken in order, is zero].

Example 11. The magnitude of the resultant of two forces P and Q acting at a point is (2m+1) \(\sqrt{P^2+Q^2}\) when the angle between them is a, and is (2m- 1)\(\sqrt{P^2+Q^2}\) when the angle is \(\left(\frac{\pi}{2}-\alpha\right)\) Prove that, \(\tan \alpha=\frac{m-1}{m+1}\).
Solution:

When the angle is, the magnitude of the resultant is, R = \(\sqrt{P^2+Q^2+2 P Q \cos \alpha}\)

Given, \(R=(2 m+1) \sqrt{P^2+Q^2}\)

On comparison, \(P^2+Q^2+2 P Q \cos \alpha=(2 m+1)^2\left(P^2+Q^2\right)\)

or, \(2 P Q \cos \alpha=\left(P^2+Q^2\right)\left\{(2 m+1)^2-1\right\}\)

= \(\left(P^2+Q^2\right)\left(4 m^2+4 m+1-1\right)\)

or, \(P Q \cos \alpha=2\left(P^2+Q^2\right) m(m+1)\)

= \(2 m(m+1)\left(P^2+Q^2\right)\)….(1)

Again, when the angle is \(\left(\frac{\pi}{2}-\alpha\right)\), the magnitude of the resultant is,

R’ = \(=\sqrt{P^2+Q^2+2 P Q \cos \left(\frac{\pi}{2}-\alpha\right)}=\sqrt{P^2+Q^2+2 P Q \sin \alpha}\)

Given, \(R^{\prime}=(2 m-1) \sqrt{P^2+Q^2}\).

On comparison, \(P^2+Q^2+2 P Q \sin \alpha=(2 m-1)^2\left(P^2+Q^2\right)\)

or, \(2PQ \sin \alpha=\left(P^2+Q^2\right)\left\{(2 m-1)^2-1\right\}\)

= \(\left(P^2+Q^2\right)\left(4 m^2-4 m+1-1\right)\)

or, \(P Q \sin \alpha=2\left(P^2+Q^2\right) m(m-1)\)

= \(2 m(m-1)\left(P^2+Q^2\right)\)….(2)

Dividing (2) by (1), we have, \(\tan \alpha=\frac{m-1}{m+1}\).

Example 12. Two forces P and Q have a resultant R. This resultant is doubled, either when Q Is doubled, or when Q is reversed. Show that, P:Q:P = √2:√3:√2.
Solution:

Let the angle between P and Q be \(\alpha\).

So, \(R^2=P^2+Q^2+2 P Q\) cosα

or, \(2 P Q \cos \alpha=R^2-P^2-Q^2\)…..(1)

When Q is doubled, \((2 R)^2=P^2+(2 Q)^2+2 P \cdot 2 Q \cos \alpha\)

or, \(2 P Q \cos \alpha=2 R^2-\frac{1}{2} P^2-2 Q^2\)…..(2)

Again, when Q is reversed, \((2 R)^2=P^2+Q^2+2 P Q \cos \left(180^{\circ}-\alpha\right)\)

or, \(2 P Q \cos \alpha=-4 R^2+P^2+Q^2\)…..(3)

From (1) and (3), \(R^2-P^2-Q^2=-4 R^2+P^2+Q^2\)

or, \(2 P^2+2 Q^2-5 R^2=0\)…..(4)

From (1) and (2), \(R^2-P^2-Q^2=2 R^2-\frac{1}{2} P^2-2 Q^2\)

or, \(P^2-2 Q^2+2 R^2=0\)…….(5)

Adding (4) and (5), \(3 P^2-3 R^2=0\) or, \(P=R\)

Putting this in (5), \(P^2-2 Q^2+2 P^2=0\) or, \(3 P^2=2 Q^2\) or, \(Q=\frac{\sqrt{3}}{\sqrt{2}} P\)

∴ \(P: Q: R=P: \frac{\sqrt{3}}{\sqrt{2}} P: P=1: \frac{\sqrt{3}}{\sqrt{2}}: 1=\sqrt{2}: \sqrt{3}: \sqrt{2}\)

Example 13. The resultant of two forces P and Q, inclined at a fixed angle, is it which makes an angle θ with P. If P is replaced by (P+ Q) keeping the direction unchanged, show that the resultant of (P+ R) and Q would be inclined at \(\frac{\theta}{2}\) with P+ R.
Solution:

Let a = angle between P and Q.

Then, R² = P² + Q² + 2PQcosα….(1)

and \(\tan \theta=\frac{Q \sin \alpha}{P+Q \cos \alpha}\)…..(2)

In the second case, if the resultant makes an angle θ1 with P+R, then \(\tan \theta_1=\frac{Q \sin \alpha}{(P+R)+Q \cos \alpha}\)….(3)

Now, \(\tan \left(\theta-\theta_1\right)=\frac{\tan \theta-\tan \theta_1}{1+\tan \theta \tan \theta_1}\)

= \(\frac{\frac{Q \sin \alpha}{P+Q \cos \alpha}-\frac{Q \sin \alpha}{(P+R)+Q \cos \alpha}}{1+\frac{Q^2 \sin ^2 \alpha}{[P+Q \cos \alpha][(P+R)+Q \cos \alpha]}}\)

= \(\frac{R Q \sin \alpha}{[P+Q \cos \alpha][(P+R)+Q \cos \alpha]+Q^2 \sin ^2 \alpha}\)

= \(\frac{R Q \sin \alpha}{P^2+Q^2+2 P Q \cos \alpha+P R+R Q \cos \alpha}\)

= \(\frac{R Q \sin \alpha}{R^2+R(P+Q \cos \alpha)}=\frac{Q \sin \alpha}{(P+R)+Q \cos \alpha}\)

= \(\tan \theta_1 \text { [using equation (1) and (3)] }\)

∴ \(\theta-\theta_1=\theta_1 \quad \text { or, } \theta_1=\frac{\theta}{2}\)

Example 14. Four forces 2 P, P, P, and 2P acton a point towards NE, NW, SW, and SE directions respectively. Find the resultant of the forces.
Solution:

The forces 2P along NE, P along NW, P along SW, and 2P along SE are represented by \(\overrightarrow{O A}, \overrightarrow{A B}, \overrightarrow{B C} \text { and } \overrightarrow{C D}\) respectively.

The initial point O and the terminal point D are joined. Hence, the resultant of the four given vectors is \(\overrightarrow{O D}\).

Vector Four Forces Of A Vector

Let ∠EOD = θ.

The quadrilateral EABC is a square. So, from ΔODE, DE = OE =P and ∠OED = 90°

Vector Two Forces Of Resulant

∴ OD = \(\sqrt{P^2+P^2}=\sqrt{2 P^2}=\sqrt{2 P}\)

and \(\tan \theta=\frac{D E}{O E}=\frac{P}{P}=1 \quad \text { or, } \theta=45^{\circ}\)

Since, \(\overrightarrow{O A}\) is along NE, \(\overrightarrow{O D}\) is along east.

Alternative solution: The forces 2 P and P along NE and SW directions respectively are opposite to each other. Hence, their resultant = (2P-P) is equal to a force P directed towards NE.

Similarly, the resultant of P directed towards NW and 2P towards SE is equal to a force P along SE.

Now there two forces, P along NE and P along SE, are perpendicular to each other. So, the resultant is, F = \(\sqrt{P^2+P^2}=\sqrt{2} P\)

If the resultant F makes an angle 6 with P along NE, then tan9 = \(\frac{P}{P}\) = 1 or, 6 = 45°

Thus, F is in the eastward direction.

Hence, the resultant of the four forces is 72 P along the x-axis, i.e., along the east.

 

Resolutions Of Vectors

A vector can be resolved into many components just as many vectors can be added to give a single resultant vector.

Resolutions Of vectors Definition: When a vector is split into two or more vectors in such a manner that, the original vector becomes the resultant of the resolved parts or components of the vector, this splitting is called the resolution of vectors.

  • Apparently, it may seem that the resolution of vectors is just the opposite of the addition of vectors. But it may be noted that, when two vectors are added, it gives only one resultant vector. On the other hand, in the resolution of vectors, different sets of components can be formed.
  • The resolution of vectors into two or three components is an elegant technique to solve most of the problems related to vectors. Splitting into more than three components is very rare in practice.

Resolution In Two Dimensions

Resolution Of Vectors Into Two Components: Let the magnitude and direction of a given vector \(\vec{R}\) be represented by \(\overrightarrow{O A}\). OM and ON are inclined to OA by angles α and β respectively, in such a way that OA, OM, and ON lie on the same plane. The vector \(\vec{R}\) is to be resolved into components along OM and ON.

Vector Resolution In Two Dimensions

AC parallel to OM and AB parallel to ON are drawn to complete the parallelogram. Now, from the law of parallelogram of vectors, \(\overrightarrow{O B}+\overrightarrow{O C}=\overrightarrow{O A}\)

Thus, the two components of \(\overrightarrow{O A}\) are \(\overrightarrow{O B}\) and \(\overrightarrow{O C}\)  and their magnitudes are a and b respectively.

∴ OB = a and OC = BA = b

Applying trigonometric rules to ΔOAB, we get, \(\frac{O B}{\sin \angle O A B}=\frac{B A}{\sin \angle A O B}=\frac{O A}{\sin \angle A B O}\)

or, \(\frac{a}{\sin \beta}=\frac{b}{\sin \alpha}=\frac{R}{\sin [\pi-\{\alpha+\beta\}]}\)

or, \(\frac{a}{\sin \beta}=\frac{b}{\sin \alpha}=\frac{R}{\sin (\alpha+\beta)}\)

Hence, \(a=\frac{R \sin \beta}{\sin (\alpha+\beta)}\) and \(b=\frac{R \sin \alpha}{\sin (\alpha+\beta)}\)…..(1)

Since α and β can have many sets of values, a and b can also have many values. Hence, a vector can be resolved into different pairs of components.

The two most useful components of a vector are the two mutually perpendicular components when α + β = 90°. Then from equation (1), we get

a = \(\frac{R \sin \left(90^{\circ}-\alpha\right)}{\sin 90^{\circ}}=R \cos \alpha\)

and b = \(\frac{R \sin \alpha}{\sin 90^{\circ}}=R \sin \alpha\)…..(2)

Again, depending on α, different pairs of orthogonal components are possible.

Applications of Gravity Variation in Physics

Resolution Of Vectors Into Rectangular Or Orthogonal Components: \(\vec{R}\) has been resolved into two components along two mutually perpendicular axes OX and OY.

Let \(\overrightarrow{O B}=\vec{a}, \overrightarrow{O C}=\vec{b} \text { and } \angle A O B=\alpha\); i.e., the component \(\vec{a}\) is inclined to the vector R at an angle α.

Vector Resolution Of Vectors Into Rectangular Or Orthogonal Components

According to \(\cos \alpha=\frac{O B}{O A}=\frac{a}{R}\)

or, a = Rcosα…..(1)

and \(\sin \alpha=\frac{A B}{O A}=\frac{b}{R} \text { or, } b=R \sin \alpha\)….(2)

Hence, the component of \(\vec{R}\) along a direction that makes an angle α with \(\vec{R}\) is Rcosα, and the other component is Rsinα.

Resolution Of Vectors Into Rectangular Or Orthogonal Components Special Cases: To determine the component of a vector \(\vec{R}\) along its own direction, we put α = 0° in equation (1) and get a = Rcos0° = R.

Again, by putting α = 0° in equation (2) [or, α = 90° in equation (1)], we get the other component, i.e., the component in the direction perpendicular to \(\vec{R}\), as, b = Rsin 0° = 0.

Hence, we may conclude that,

  1. The component (or resolved part) of a vector along its own direction is the vector itself.
  2. There is no component in a direction perpendicular to the vector.

Practical Example—Pull Or Push: A body can be set into motion along a horizontal plane by pushing it from the back or by pulling it towards the front. When the body is pushed, the applied force F1 usually acts downwards at an angle with the horizontal.

  • Horizontal motion of the body is due to the horizontal component Fx of the applied force F1. The vertical component Fy, acting downwards, adds to the weight of the body, and hence, pushing becomes difficult.
  • On the other hand, while pulling, the applied force F2 acts upwards at an angle with the horizontal. In this case, also, the horizontal component F’x of F2 produces the horizontal motion of the body. The vertical component F’y acting upwards, effectively reduces the weight of the body. Hence pulling becomes easier.

vector Practical Example Of Pull Or Push

Thus, it is easier to pull a body than to push it.

Resolutions In Two Dimensional Numerical Examples

Example 1. A force of 30 dyn Is inclined to the y-axis at an angle of 60°. Find the components of the force along the x and y axes respectively.
Solution:

Given, F = 30 dyn and θ = 60°

Hence, a component of F along the y-axis, Fy = F cosθ = F cos60° = 30 x 1/2 = 15 dyn

and a component of F along x-axis \(F_x=F \sin 60^{\circ}=30 \times \frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}=15 \sqrt{3} \text { dyn }.\)

Example 2. The value of the resultant of two mutually perpendicular forces is 80 Dyn. The resultant makes an angle 60° with one of the forces. Find the magnitudes of the forces.
Solution:

Let the forces be \(\vec{P}\), \(\vec{R}\) and the resultant that makes an angle 60° with \(\vec{P}\) be  \(\vec{R}.\)

Here, R = 80 dyn

∴ P = R cosθ – 80 cos60° = 80 x 1/2 = 40 dyn

and Q = R sin60° =80 sin60° = \(80 \times \frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\) = 40√3 dyn .

 

Motion Of A Projectile

Motion Of A Projectile Definition: A body thrown upwards in any direction from the earth’s surface or a point close to it, is called a projectile. Common examples of projectiles are

  1. A javelin thrown by an athlete,
  2. A bullet fired from a rifle,
  3. An object dropped from an airplane,
  4. A jet of water coming out from the side hole of a vessel,
  5. A stone thrown from the top of a hill or a tower,
  6. A rocket after its fuel is exhausted.

The path traced out by a projectile is called its trajectory. The motion of a projectile is two-dimensional as it is always confined to a vertical plane.

  • To study the projectile motion the horizontal direction is taken along the x-axis and the vertical direction is taken along the y-axis. The only force acting on the projectile is the gravitational force.
  • So the projectile has acceleration in the y direction which is equal to the acceleration due to gravity. The force acting on the projectile is zero along the x-axis. So the horizontal acceleration is zero. This means, that projectile motion is a combination of horizontal motion with constant velocity and vertical motion with uniform acceleration.
  • Let a body be projected from a point O with velocity u making an angle α with the horizontal. The body reaches B following the path OAB through the highest point A. Points B and O lie on the same horizontal plane.

vector Point Of Projection

O is the point of projection, u is the velocity of projection, the angle of projection, and OB is the horizontal range; the time taken for traveling the path OAB is called the time of flight. Velocity of projection u has a horizontal component = \(u_{x_0}=u \cos \alpha\) and a vertical component = \(u_{y_0}=u \sin \alpha\).

  • As acceleration due to gravity (g) acts vertically downward, the velocity component usina gradually changes. Hence, the vertical motion of the body is a motion under gravity. But since g has no component along the horizontal direction, the acceleration or deceleration of the horizontal component of motion is zero.
  • Hence, the motion of the body along the horizontal direction is uniform, i.e., horizontal velocity \(u_{x_0}=u \cos \alpha\) = constant. It is convenient to use the vertical motion and the horizontal motion separately in discussions related to projectile motion.

Principle Of Physical Independence Of Motions: In the absence of air resistance the motion of a projectile is considered as the combination of the following two independent motions.

  1. Motion along the horizontal direction with uniform velocity.
  2. Motion along vertical direction under gravity i.e., uniform acceleration equal to g.

The two motions of a projectile along horizontal and vertical directions are independent of each other. This is called the principle of physical independence of motion.

Principle Of Physical Independence Of Motions Key Points:

  1. A projectile returns to the ground at the same angle and with the same velocity with which it is projected.
  2. When a projectile is at the highest point of its trajectory
    1. It possesses velocity only along horizontal,
    2. The velocity and acceleration of the projectile are perpendicular to each other.

Equations For Projectile Motion: Let the time taken by the projectile to reach the point P be t.

For the horizontal motion of the projectile we have, \(v_x=u_{x_0}+a_x t\)

or, \(v_x=u \cos \alpha\) (because \(a_x=0\))….(1)

where vx is the horizontal component of the velocity of the projectile after time t.

Again, \(x=u_{x_0} t+\frac{1}{2} a_x t^2\)

or, \(x=u_{x_0} t=u \cos \alpha t\)….(2)

From this equation, we get the horizontal position of the projectile after time t.

Vector Horizontal Position Of Projectile

Gravity Variation with Depth Below Earth’s Surface

For the vertical motion of the projectile, ay=-g

∴ \(v_y=u_{y_0}+a_y t\)

[vy is the vertical component of velocity of the projectile after time t]

or, \(v_y=u_{y_0}-g t\) (because \(a_y=-g\))……(3)

Again, \(v_y^2=u_{y_0}^2-2 g y\)

and \(y=u_{y_0} t+\frac{1}{2} a_y t^2=u_{y_0} t-\frac{1}{2} g t^2\)

From equation (4), we get the vertical position of the projectile after time t.

Equations For Projectile Motion Maximum Height: The maximum height of a projectile is the maximum vertical distance attained by the projectile above the horizontal plane of projection. It is denoted by H. To calculate the height of the projectile, consider only its vertical motion. The vertical component of the velocity of projection = u sinα and velocity at the highest point = 0.

If H = maximum height, \(0=(u \sin \alpha)^2-2 g H \text { or, } H=\frac{u^2 \sin ^2 \alpha}{2 g}\)….(5)

It should be noted that the body attains maximum height by reaching a point that is not exactly above point O. Because of the horizontal component of motion, the body has a horizontal displacement as well. the highest point on the trajectory of the projectile is point A and maximum height (H) = AC.

Time Of Flight: It is the time taken by the projectile from the instant it is projected till it reaches a point in the horizontal plane of its projection. As shown the total time taken to reach point B from point O is the time of flight.

Let the time taken to reach the maximum height be T1

Hence, \(0=u \sin \alpha-g T_1 \text { or, } T_1=\frac{u \sin \alpha}{g}\)….(6)

On reaching the highest point, the body starts descending again. At the same time, the body covers a horizontal path due to its horizontal component of motion. Finally, the body reaches B. Thus, the body follows the trajectory OAB.

The height of B with respect to the point of projection, O is zero, i.e., the vertical displacement of the object is zero. Hence, if T is the time required to cover the path OAB,

0 = \(u \sin \alpha \cdot T-\frac{1}{2} g T^2\) [from equation (4)]

∴ \(2 u \sin \alpha=g T or, T=\frac{2 u \sin \alpha}{g}\)…..(7)

Comparing equations (6) and (7), \(2 T_1=\frac{2 u \sin \alpha}{g}=T \text { or, } T_1=\frac{T}{2}\)

So, the time required to reach the maximum height is equal to half the time of flight.

Horizontal Range: Let the horizontal range be OB = R. The horizontal distance traversed by the body in time T is R. Since the body crosses the distance R horizontally with a uniform velocity ucosα,

R = \(u \cos \alpha \cdot T=u \cos \alpha \cdot \frac{2 u \sin \alpha}{g}\)

= \(\frac{2 u^2 \sin \alpha \cos \alpha}{g}=\frac{u^2}{g} \sin 2 \alpha\)…..(8)

The value of R is maximum when sin 2α is maximum. Therefore, the condition for covering the maximum horizontal distance for a particular initial velocity u, is sin 2α = 1 = sin90° or, α = 45°.

∴ \(R_{\max }=\text { Maximum range }=\frac{u^2}{g}\)…..(9)

To send a projectile to the maximum possible distance, it has to be thrown at an angle of 45° with the horizontal. This is why sportsmen try to throw the javelin or discus at 45°.

It should be noted that if the angle of projection is (\(\frac{\pi}{2}-\alpha\)) instead of a, the horizontal range remains the same for a particular velocity of projection, since, \(R^{\prime}=\frac{u^2}{g} \sin \left\{2\left(\frac{\pi}{2}-\alpha\right)\right\}\) = \(\frac{u^2}{g} \sin (\pi-2 \alpha)=\frac{u^2}{g} \sin 2 \alpha=R\)

Locus Of A Projectile: Let us take a reference frame such that, its positive y-axis extends vertically upwards, and the positive x-axis extends horizontally in the direction of the horizontal component of the velocity of the projectile. The origin is taken as the point of projection

Let the point reached by the body from O in time f be P and the coordinates of P be (x, y).

y = \(u \sin \alpha \cdot t-\frac{1}{2} g t^2\)…………(10)

Vector Locus Of A Projctile

Again, as the horizontal velocity =ucosa = constant, x = ucosα · t

or, \(t=\frac{x}{u \cos \alpha}\)

From (10) and (11), \(y=u \sin \alpha \frac{x}{u \cos \alpha}-\frac{1}{2} g \frac{x^2}{u^2 \cos ^2 \alpha}\)

or, y = \(x \tan \alpha-\frac{g}{2 u^2 \cos ^2 \alpha} x^2\)

This equation is the locus of the projectile.

The equation is of the type y=ax+bx² which is the equation of a parabola. Hence, the trajectory of a projectile is parabolic.

Motion Of A Projectile Numerical Examples

Example 1. A body is projected with a velocity of 20 m s-1, making an angle of 45° with the horizontal. Calculate—

  1. The time taken to reach the ground [g = 10 m s-2],
  2. The maximum height it can attain and
  3. Horizontal range.

Solution:

The vertical and horizontal components of the velocity of 20 m s-1 are \(u_H=20 \cos 45^{\circ}=20 \times \frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}=10 \sqrt{2} \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

and \(u_V=20 \sin 45^{\circ}=20 \times \frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}=10 \sqrt{2} \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\).

1. Let the total time of flight of the body be t. Considering the vertical motion of the body, we get from the equation h = ut-\(\frac{1}{2}\)gt²,

0 = \(10 \sqrt{2} t-\frac{1}{2} \cdot 10 \cdot t^2 \quad[\text { as } h=0]\)

or, \(5 t^2=10 \sqrt{2} t\)

∴ Total time of flight, \(t=\frac{10 \sqrt{2}}{5}=2 \sqrt{2}=2 \times 1.414=2.828 \mathrm{~s}\)

2. Let the maximum height attained be h. Vertical velocity at the maximum height = 0.

Considering the vertical motion of the body, we get from the equation v² = u²- 2gh,

0 = (10√2)² -2 ·10 · h

∴ h = 10m

3. Let the distance from the point of projection to the point at the ground where the body touches be x. By considering the horizontal motion of the body, we get,

x = uH x t = 10√2 x 2√2 = 40 m.

∴ The horizontal range = 40 m.

Mathematical Formulas for Gravity Variation

Example 2.  A plane is flying horizontally at a height of 196 m at 600 km · h-1 with respect to the ground. On reaching a point directly above A, the plane drops an object that reaches the ground at B. Find the distance AB.
Solution:

Let the point directly above A from where the object is dropped be O

Therefore, OA = 1960 m. Let the time taken by the object to hit the ground at B be t.

Vector Plane Is Flying Horizontally

Since the plane is flying horizontally, the initial vertical velocity of the object = 0 and vertical (downward) A displacement = 1960 m.

Considering the vertical motion of the object, we get from the equation h = ut + \(\frac{1}{2}\) gt²,

1960 = \(0 \times t+\frac{1}{2} \times 9.8 \times t^2\)

or, \(t^2=\frac{2 \times 1960}{9.8}=400\) or, \(t=20 \mathrm{~s}\)

The initial horizontal velocity of the body = \(600 \mathrm{~km} \cdot \mathrm{h}^{-1}=\frac{600 \times 1000}{60 \times 60} \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}=\frac{500}{3} \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

So, the object moves at a uniform velocity of \(\frac{500}{3} \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\) in the horizontal direction. Hence,

AB = \(\frac{500}{3} \times 20 \mathrm{~m}=\frac{500 \times 20}{3 \times 1000} \mathrm{~km}=\frac{10}{3}=3.33 \mathrm{~km}\)

Example 3.  A particle falls from rest from the highest point of a vertical circle of radius r, along a chord without any friction. Show that the time taken by the particle to come down is independent of the chord’s length. Find the time in terms of r and g.
Solution:

Let the chord along which the particle falls be CD. The CD makes an angle θ with the vertical diameter as shown. CD = 2 r cosθ. The component of acceleration due to gravity along CD = g cosθ.

Let the time taken by this particle to fall from rest along CD be t.

Vector Particle Falls From Rest

Hence, from the equation s = ut + \(\frac{1}{2}\) at²,

2r \(\cos \theta\) = \(0+\frac{1}{2} g \cos \theta \cdot t^2\)

or, \(t^2=\frac{4 r}{g} \text { or, } t=2 \sqrt{\frac{r}{g}}\)

The time is independent of θ, and hence on the length of the chord CD.

Example 4. At what angle with respect to the horizontal, should a projectile be thrown with a velocity of 19.6 m · s-1, to just clear a wall 14.7 m high, at a distance of 19.6 m?
Solution:

Let the angle of projection be θ. Hence horizontal component of velocity = 19.6 cosθ m · s-1 and its vertical component = 19.6 sinθ m · s-1.

Let the time after which the projectile crosses the wall be t.

Vector Angle With Horizontal A Projectile

Considering horizontal motion, 19.6 = 19.6 cosθ x t or, t = secθ

For the vertical motion, 14.7 =19.6 sinθ x t \(\frac{1}{2}\) x 9.8 x t²

or, 14.7 = 19.6 sinθ x secθ-4.9 sec²θ

or, 3 = 4 tanθ – (1 + tan²θ) or, tan²θ-4tanθ + 4 = 0

or, (tanθ – 2)³ = 0 or, tanθ = 2

∴ θ = tan-1 2 = 63.4°

Example 5. A block of ice is sliding down the sloping roof of a house and the angle of inclination of the roof with the horizontal is 30°. The maximum and minimum heights of the roof from the ground are 8.1 m and 5.6 m. How far from the starting point, measured horizontally, does the block land? [ignore friction].
Solution:

Let the highest point of the roof be A and the lowest point be P as shown.

∴ AC= 8.1 m; PD = 5.6 m

∴ AB =AC-BC =AC-PD= 8.1 -5.6 = 2.5 m

AP = \(\frac{A B}{\sin 30^{\circ}}=\frac{2.5}{\frac{1}{2}}=5 \mathrm{~m}\)

Vector Velocity Of The Block

Let the velocity of the block at P be v.

Considering the motion of the block from A to P,

v² = 2g sin30° xAP = 2 x 9.8 x \(\frac{1}{2}\) x 5 = 49 or, v = 7 m · s-1.

The horizontal and vertical components of the velocity at P are \(v \cos 30^{\circ}=\frac{7 \sqrt{3}}{2} \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1} \quad \text { and } \quad v \sin 30^{\circ}=\frac{7}{2} \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\) respectively.

Let the total time taken by the block to come from P to E be t. Considering the vertical motion of the block,

5.6 = \(\frac{7}{2} t+\frac{1}{2} \times 9.8 \times t^2 \quad \text { or, } 7 t^2+5 t-8=0\)

∴ t = \(\frac{-5 \pm \sqrt{25+224}}{14}=0.77 \mathrm{~s}\) [taking the positive value of t]

Now, DE =  \(\nu \cos 30^{\circ} \times t=\frac{7 \sqrt{3}}{2} \times 0.77=2.7 \sqrt{3} \mathrm{~m}\)

∴ CE = \(C D+D E=2.5 \sqrt{3}+2.7 \sqrt{3}\)

(\(\tan 30^{\circ}=\frac{A B}{P B} \text { or, } P B=2.5 \sqrt{3} \mathrm{~m}\) and, DC = \(P B=2.5 \sqrt{3} \mathrm{~m}]\))

= \(5.2 \sqrt{3}=9 \mathrm{~m}\)

Example 6. The equation of the trajectory of a projectile on s vertical plane is y = ax- bx², where a and b are constants, and x and y respectively are the horizontal distances of the projectile from the point of projection. Find out the maximum height attained by the projectile, and also the angle of projection with respect to the horizontal.
Solution:

Let, u = velocity of projection; α = angle of projection

The velocity ucosα in the horizontal direction is uniform.

So, in time t, x = \(u \cos \alpha \cdot t \quad \text { or, } t=\frac{x}{u \cos \alpha}\)

The velocity u sin α in the vertically upward direction is under a uniform retardation -g, where g is the acceleration due to gravity.

Then, in time t, y = \(u \sin \alpha \cdot t-\frac{1}{2} g t^2=u \sin \alpha \cdot \frac{x}{u \cos \alpha}-\frac{1}{2} g \frac{x^2}{u^2 \cos ^2 \alpha}\)

or, \(y=x \tan \alpha-\frac{g}{2 u^2 \cos ^2 \alpha} x^2\)

Comparing with the given equation y=a x-bx², we get

  1. a =θ, or angle of projection, \(\theta=\tan ^{-1} a\).
  2. b = \(\frac{g}{2 u^2 \cos ^2 \alpha} \quad or, u^2=\frac{g}{2 b \cos ^2 \alpha}\)

At maximum height H, the velocity of the projectile is zero.

Considering vertical motion, we have

0 = \((u \sin \alpha)^2-2 g H\)

or, H = \(\frac{u^2 \sin ^2 \alpha}{2 g}=\frac{g}{2 b \cos ^2 \alpha} \cdot \frac{\sin ^2 \alpha}{2 g}\)

= \(\frac{\tan ^2 \alpha}{4 b}=\frac{a^2}{4 b}\)

Example 7. A gun fires at an angle 30° with the horizontal and hits a target at a distance of 3 km. Can another target at a distance of 5 km be hit by changing the angle of projection but keeping the velocity of projection unchanged?
Solution:

Horizontal range, \(R=\frac{u^2 \sin 2 \alpha}{g}\)

In the first case, 3 = \(\frac{u^2 \sin \left(2 \times 30^{\circ}\right)}{g}=\frac{u^2}{g} \frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\)

or, \(\frac{u^2}{g}=2 \sqrt{3}\)

If the velocity of projection is unchanged, the maximum horizontal range for \(\alpha=45^{\circ}\), is \(R_{\max }=\frac{u^2 \sin \left(2 \times 45^{\circ}\right)}{g}=\frac{u^2}{g}=2 \sqrt{3}\)

= \(2 \times 1.732=3.464 \mathrm{~km}\)

So, a target at a distance of 5 km cannot be hit.

Example 8. A gun is kept on a horizontal road and is used to hit a running car. The uniform speed of the car is 72 km/h. At the instant of firing at an angle of 45° with the horizontal, the car is at a distance of 500 m from the gun. Find out the distance between the gun and the car at the instant of hitting. Given, 10 m/s².
Solution:

Velocity of the car, v = 72 km/h = 20 m/s;

if it is hit after a time s, then its displacement = 201 m

∴ Distance between the gun and the car at that instant,

D =  500 + 20tm.

If u be the initial velocity of the bullet, then its horizontal range,

R = \(\frac{u^2 \sin \left(2 \times 45^{\circ}\right)}{g}=\frac{u^2}{g}\)

∴ \(\frac{u^2}{g}=500+20 t\)…..(1)

Considering the vertical motion of the bullet in time t, we have

0 = \(u \sin 45^{\circ} \cdot t-\frac{1}{2} g t^2 \quad \text { or, } \frac{u t}{\sqrt{2}}=\frac{1}{2} g t^2\)

or, u = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}} g t\)

∴ \(u^2=\frac{1}{2} g^2 t^2 \quad \text { or, } \frac{u^2}{g}=\frac{1}{2} g t^2=\frac{1}{2} \times 10 \times t^2=5 t^2\)

Putting in (1), we get \(5 t^2=500+20 t \text { or, } t^2-4 t-100=0\)

∴ t = \(\frac{4 \pm \sqrt{16-4 \times 1 \times(-100)}}{2 \times 1}=2 \pm \sqrt{104}\)

Keeping only the positive value of t, we have \(t=2 \pm \sqrt{104}=12.2 \mathrm{~s}\)

So, we get, \(D=500+20 t=500+20 \times 12.2=744 \mathrm{~m} \text {. }\)

Example 9. The initial velocity of a projectile is (\(\hat{i}+2 \hat{j}\)) m/s, where i and j are unit vectors along the horizontal and vertical directions respectively. Find out the locus of the projectile, taking g = 10 m/s².
Solution:

Horizontal and vertical components of initial velocity are, respectively,

ux = 1 m/s and uy = 2 m/s

Let, at t = 0, the initial coordinates of the projectile are (0, 0); at time t, these are (x, y).

So, \(x=u_x t=t \mathrm{~m}\)

y = \(u_y t-\frac{1}{2} g t^2=\left(2 t-5 t^2\right)=2 x-5 x^2\)

∴ \(y=2 x-5 x^2\) is the locus of the projectile.

Example 10. Two objects are thrown simultaneously from the same point with the same initial velocity at angles of projection α and β respectively. If they reach the top and the bottom of a tower simultaneously, then prove that tanα – tanβ = tanθ where θ = angle of elevation of the tower from the point of projection.
Solution:

Horizontal range of the 2nd projectile

OB = \(x=\frac{u^2 \sin 2 \beta}{g}=\frac{2 u^2}{g} \sin \beta \cos \beta\)…..(1)

Vector Two Objects Are Thrown

Time of flight of the 2nd projectile, t = \(\frac{2 u \sin \beta}{g}\)

= time taken by the 1st projectile from O to A

For the horizontal motion of the 1st projectile,

OB = \(x=u \cos \alpha \cdot t=u \cos \alpha \cdot \frac{2 u \sin \beta}{g}\)

= \(\frac{2 u^2}{g} \sin \beta \cos \alpha\)……….(2)

Comparing (1) and (2), we have \(\cos \alpha=\cos \beta\)…….(3)

For the vertical motion of the 1st projectile, AB = \(y=u \sin \alpha \cdot t-\frac{1}{2} g t^2\)

= \(u \sin \alpha \frac{2 u \sin \beta}{g}-\frac{1}{2} g\left(\frac{2 u \sin \beta}{g}\right)^2\)

= \(\frac{2 u^2}{g}\left(\sin \alpha \sin \beta-\sin ^2 \beta\right)\)…….(4)

Diving (4) by (1), we have \(\tan \theta=\frac{A B}{O B}=\frac{y}{x}=\frac{\sin \alpha \sin \beta-\sin ^2 \beta}{\sin \beta \cos \beta}\)

= \(\frac{\sin \alpha}{\cos \beta}-\frac{\sin \beta}{\cos \beta}=\frac{\sin \alpha}{\cos \alpha}-\tan \beta\)

= \(tan \alpha-\tan \beta\) (using (3))

Example 11. A truck starts from rest and accelerates uniformly. at 2 m · s-2 At t = 10 s, a stone is dropped by a person standing on the top of the truck (6 m high from the ground). What are the

  1. Velocity and
  2. Acceleration of the stone at t = 11 s? (Neglect air resistance).

Solution:

The velocity of the truck after 10s = at = 2 x 10 = 20 m · s-1

So, at the time of release, the stone has a horizontal velocity of 20 m • s-1, but no vertical velocity. Its horizontal acceleration = 0 and vertical acceleration, g = 9.8 m • s-2.

1. At 11 s, i.e., 1 s after release, the horizontal velocity of the stone = 20 m • s-1;

vertical velocity = gt = 9.8 x 1 = 9.8 m • s-1

So, the resultant velocity = \(\sqrt{(20)^2+(9.8)^2}=22.27 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

2. The acceleration of the stone = downward acceleration due to gravity = 9.8 m • s-2

 

Vector Synopsis

Geometrical Representation Of A Vector:

  1. A vector is represented by a line segment with an arrowhead,
  2. The magnitude of the vector is the length of the line segment and
  3. The direction of the vector is shown by the arrowhead.

Triangle Law Of Vector Addition: If two sides of a triangle taken in order, represent the magnitudes and directions of two vectors, the third side, taken in the opposite order, represents the magnitude and direction of the resultant of the two vectors.

If three vectors can be represented by the three sides of a triangle, taken in order, the resultant of the vectors is a zero vector.

Parallelogram Law Of Vector Addition: If two adjacent sides of a parallelogram represent the magnitudes and directions of two vectors, then the diagonal, drawn through the intersection of the two sides of the parallelogram, represents the magnitude and direction of the resultant of the two vectors. In this case the point of intersection is the initial point of the two vectors and their resultant.

Polygon Law Of Vector Addition: If the magnitudes and directions of a number of vectors are represented by the sides of a polygon, taken in order, then the last side, taken in the opposite order, represents the magnitude and direction of the resultant of the vectors.

  • If any vector is split into two or more vectors such that the original vector becomes the resultant of the split parts or components of the vector, then this splitting is called the resolution of vectors.
  • Component of a vector in the same direction as the vector has the same magnitude as the vector itself.
  • No vector has a component at right angles to itself.
  • When the position of a point with respect to the origin is represented by a vector, then that vector is called the position vector.
  • The apparent velocity of a body, with respect to another body at rest or in motion, is called its relative velocity.
  • The apparent acceleration of a body, with respect to another body moving with or without, is called its relative acceleration.
  • The scalar product or dot product of two vectors is a scalar, whereas the vector product or cross product of two vectors is another vector.
  • A body thrown obliquely from the earth’s surface or from a point close to it is called a projectile.
  • The path of a projectile is parabolic except for those projected along the vertical direction. In that case, it is a straight line.

Resultant of \(\vec{a}\) and \(\vec{b}\), when the angle between them is \(\alpha\), is \(\vec{c}\) such that \(c=\sqrt{a^2+b^2+2 a b \cos \alpha}\). [equation giving the magnitude of the resultant]

If the angle between \(\vec{a}\) and \(\vec{c}\) is \(\theta\), then \(\tan \theta=\frac{b \sin \alpha}{a+b \cos \alpha}\) [equation giving the direction of the resultant]

  1. When \(\alpha=0\), \(c=a+b=c_{\max }\) (maximum possible value of the resultant) and \(\theta=0\).
  2. For \(\alpha=\pi\), \(c=|a-b|=c_{\text {min }}\) (minimum possible value of c) and \(\theta=0\), (when a>b) or \(\theta=\pi\) (when a<b)
    • Note: α or θ is usually measured from \(\vec{a}\).
  3. When \(\alpha=\frac{\pi}{2}\) then \(c=\sqrt{a^2+b^2}\) and \(\theta=\tan ^{-1} \frac{b}{a}\).

Characteristics Of Vector Addition:

  1. \(\vec{A}+\vec{B}=\vec{B}+\vec{A}\) [Commutative rule]
  2. \(\vec{A}+(\vec{B}+\vec{C})=(\vec{A}+\vec{B})+\vec{C}\)[Associative rule]
  3. \(\vec{A}-\vec{B}=\vec{A}+(-\vec{B})\)
  4. \((-n) \vec{A}=n(-\vec{A})=-n \vec{A}\)

If two components of \(\vec{R}\) are \(\vec{a}\) and \(\vec{b}\), angle between \(\vec{R}\) and \(\vec{a}\) is \(\alpha\), and angle between \(\vec{R}\) and \(\vec{b}\) is \(\beta\), then

a = \(\frac{R \sin \beta}{\sin (\alpha+\beta)} \text { and } b=\frac{R \sin \alpha}{\sin (\alpha+\beta)}\)

When \(\alpha+\beta=\frac{\pi}{2}\) then \(a=R \cos \alpha, b=R \sin \alpha\)

If coplanar vectors \(\vec{P}, \vec{Q}\) and \(\vec{R}\) are at angles \(\alpha, \beta\) and \(\gamma\) respectively with respect to the positive x-axis, then the component of their resultant \(\vec{F}\) along the positive x-axis, \(F_x=P \cos \alpha+Q \cos \beta+R \cos \gamma\)

and component of \(\vec{F}\)

along the positive y-axis \(F_y=P \sin \alpha+Q \sin \beta+R \sin \gamma\)

and hence, \(F=\sqrt{F_x^2+F_y^2}\)

When \(\vec{F}\) makes an angle \(\theta\) with the positive x-axis \(\theta=\tan ^{-1} \frac{F_y}{F_x}\)

Taking O as the origin of the three-dimensional cartesian coordinate system, we get the position vector of A(x, y, z) as, \(\vec{r}=\overrightarrow{O A}=x \hat{i}+y \hat{j}+z \hat{k}\)

∴ r = \(\sqrt{x^2+y^2+z^2}\)

If \(\vec{r}\) makes angles \(\alpha, \beta, \gamma\), with x, y, z axes respectively, then the direction cosines of \(\vec{r}\) are \(\cos \alpha=\frac{x}{r}, \cos \beta=\frac{y}{r}\) and \(\cos \gamma=\frac{z}{r}\) where, \(\cos ^2 \alpha+\cos ^2 \beta+\cos ^2 \gamma=1\)

The resultant of \(\vec{r}_1=x_1 \hat{i}+y_1 \hat{j}+z_1 \hat{k}\) and \(\vec{r}_2=x_2 \hat{i}+y_2 \hat{j}+z_2 \hat{k}\) is \(\vec{r}_1+\vec{r}_2=\left(x_1+x_2\right) \hat{i}+\left(y_1+y_2\right) \hat{j}+\left(z_1+z_2\right) \hat{k}\)

If \(\theta\) is the angle between \(\vec{A}\) and \(\vec{B}\), vector and scalar products of the vectors \(\vec{A}\) and \(\vec{B}\) are respectively \(\vec{A} \times \vec{B}=A B \sin \theta \hat{n} \text { and } \vec{A} \cdot \vec{B}=A B \cos \theta\)

(where \(\hat{n}\) is the unit vector perpendicular to both \(\vec{A}\) and \(\vec{B}\))

If the velocities of two particles are \(\vec{v}_1\) and \(\vec{v}_2\), then the relative velocity of the second particle with respect to the first is, \(\vec{v}=\vec{v}_2-\vec{v}_1\)

If velocity and angle of projection of a projectile are u and \(\alpha\) respectively, then

  1. Maximum height, \(H=\frac{u^2 \sin ^2 \alpha}{2 g}\)
  2. Time of flight, \(T=\frac{2 u \sin \alpha}{g}\)
  3. Range of the projectile, \(R=\frac{u^2 \sin 2 \alpha}{g}\)
  4. Equation of the locus of the projectile, y = \(x \tan \alpha-\frac{g}{2 u^2 \cos ^2 \alpha} x^2 \text { (a parabola). }\)

 

Vector Match The Columns

Question 1. \(\vec{A}=(3 \hat{i}+4 \hat{j}-5 \hat{k})\)

Vector Match The Column Question 1

Answer: 1-B, 2-C, 3-D, 4-D

Question 2. \(|\vec{A}|=2 \text { and }|\vec{B}|=4\). \(\theta\) is the angle between \(\vec{A} \text { and } \vec{B} \text {. }\)

Vector Match The Column Question 2

Answer: 1-B, 2-A, 3-D, 4-C

Question 3. \(|\vec{A}|=2 \text { and }|\vec{B}|=4\). \(\theta\) is the angle between A and B

Vector Match The Column Question 3

Answer: 1-D, 2-C, 3-A, 4-B

Question 4. If θ is the angle between two vectors A and B, then match the following columns.

Vector Match The Column Question 4

Answer: 1-D, 2-B, C, 3-A, 4-A

Question 5. Vector A is pointing eastwards and vector B is northwards. Then match the following two columns.

Vector Match The Column Question 5

Answer: 1-A, 2-D, 3-B, 4-D

Question 6. Given below in Column A is the relations between vectors \(\vec{a}\), \(\vec{b}\) and \(\vec{c}\) and in Column B are the orientations of \(\vec{a}\), \(\vec{b}\) and \(\vec{c}\) in the XY plane.

Vector Match The Column Question 6

Answer: 1-D, 2-C, 3-A, 4-B

Question 7. For a projectile thrown from the ground at an angle with the horizontal

Vector Match The Column Question 7

Answer: 1-C, 2-B, 3-D, 4-E

Vector Comprehension Type Questions And Answers

Read the following passages carefully and answer the questions at the end of them.

Question 1. A farmer goes 500 m due north, 400 m due east and 200 m due south to reach his field. He takes 20 min to reach the field.

1. How much distance does he to walk to reach the field?

  1. 900 m
  2. 1100 m
  3. 1300 m
  4. 700 m

Answer: 2. 1100 m

2. What is the displacement from his house to the field?

  1. 550 m
  2. 700 m
  3. 500 m
  4. 714 m

Answer: 3. 500 m

3. What is the average speed of the farmer during the walk?

  1. 35 m • min-1
  2. 63 m • min-1
  3. 55m · min-1
  4. 65 m · min-1

Answer: 3. 55m · min-1

4. What is the average velocity of the farmer during the walk?

  1. 27 m · min-1
  2. 30 m · min-1
  3. 35 m · min-1
  4. 25 m · min-1

Answer: 4. 25 m · min-1

Question 2. A man crosses a river in a boat. If he crosses the river in minimum time he takes 10 min with a drift 120 m. If he crosses the river taking the shortest path, he takes 12.5 min.

1. What is the width of the river?

  1. 250 m
  2. 200 m
  3. 300 m
  4. 230 m

Answer: 2. 200 m

2. What is the velocity of the boat in still water?

  1. 21 m · min-1
  2. 24 m · min-1
  3. 20 m · min-1
  4. 18 m · min-1

Answer: 3. 20 m · min-1

3. What is the speed of the current?

  1. 13 m · min-1
  2. 12 m · min-1
  3. 14 m · min-1
  4. 15 m · min-1

Answer: 2. 12 m · min-1

Question 3. A particle is projected from the surface of the earth with a speed of 20 m · s-1 at an angle 30° with the horizontal.

1. The time of flight of that particle is

  1. 3 s
  2. 4s
  3. 2s
  4. 1s

Answer: 3. 2s

2. The range of that particle is

  1. 10 m
  2. 12√2 m
  3. 20√3 m
  4. 30 m

Answer: 3. 20√3 m

3. The maximum height the particle can reach is

  1. 3 m
  2. 7 m
  3. 5m
  4. 12 m

Answer: 3. 5m

Vector Integer Answer Type Questions

In this type, the answer to each of the questions is a single-digit Integer between 0 and 9.

Question 1. A projectile is launched from the ground and it returns to the ground level. The horizontal range of the projectile is R = 175 m. If the horizontal component of the projectile’s velocity at any instant is 25 m · s-1, then determine the time of flight of the projectile.
Answer: 7

Question 2. A food packet is to be dropped by a helicopter on a flood relief mission. The helicopter is moving horizontally with a constant speed of y = 50 m · s-1. At the time of dropping the food packet, it is at a height of 2 km from the ground level. For the person shown to receive the packet, what should be the value of x in km? [Given, g = 10 m · s-2]

Vector Food Packet Dropped By Helicopter

Answer: 1

Question 3. Two men are running on a straight north-south track. Person A moves north with a speed of 5 m · s-1 while B moves south with a speed of 2 m · s-1. Determine the velocity (magnitude only) of

  1. A with respect to B.
  2. The ground with respect to A.
  3. B with respect to A.

Answer: 7, 5, 7

 

WBCHSE Class 11 Physics Newtons Law Of Motion Notes

Newton Law Of Motion

Statements Of The Laws Of Motion

In 1687, Sir Isaac Newton, in his book Principia, published three laws of motion related to all the moving objects in the universe. These are known as Newton’s laws of motion. These laws cannot be proved using any old concept of physics. Yet, their validity has been confirmed through successful explanations and predictions on numerous events in nature. Hence, the laws founded a new branch of physics called kinetics.

The Laws Are:

  1. 1st Law: Everybody continues to be in its state of rest or of uniform motion in a straight line unless the body is compelled to change its state by a net external force.
  2. 2nd Law: The rate of change of momentum of a body is proportional to the impressed force and takes place in the direction in which the force acts.
  3. 3rd Law: To every action, there is an equal and opposite reaction.

These laws involve the new concepts of

  1. Inertia,
  2. Force and
  3. Momentum.

Read and Learn More: Class 11 Physics Notes

The study of these laws is the subject of this chapter and is called Newtonian mechanics. It should be mentioned, however, that Newtonian mechanics does not apply to all situations.

  1. If the interacting bodies are moving with the speed of light (or an appreciable fraction of the speed of light), Newtonian mechanics should be replaced by Einstein’s special theory of relativity.
  2. If the interacting bodies are of atomic dimensions (for example, electrons in an atom), Newtonian mechanics should be replaced by quantum mechanics.

In short, Newtonian mechanics may be treated as a special case of these two more comprehensive theories.

WBCHSE Class 11 Physics Newtons Law Of Motion Notes

Weight Of A Body Gravitational Unit Of Force

Gravitational Unit Of Force Definition: The weight of a body is the force with which the earth attracts the body.

  • The earth’s attraction is the force of gravity, the acceleration produced by it is called the acceleration due to gravity, g, and it is always directed towards the center of the earth.
  • Hence, using the relation \(\vec{F}=m \vec{a}\), the weight of a body of mass m is formulated as \(\vec{W}=m \vec{g}\)
  • So, weight = mass x acceleration due to gravity at the place. The value of g varies at different places and hence the weight also changes. For example, a bowling ball of mass 7.2 kg weighs 71N on Earth, but only 12N on the Moon.
  • The mass of the ball is the same on both earth and the moon but the free fall acceleration on the moon is only 1.6 m/s².

Gravitational unit Of force: The force with which the earth pulls a body of unit mass, is the unit of gravitational force.

Newtons Law Of Motion Gravitational Unit Of Force

Gravitational units are no longer accepted for use with the SI units by BIPM.

From the above definitions, we see that gravitational units depend on acceleration due to gravity which varies at different places. So we cannot use these units as standard.

But accepting a value of g as a standard, a standard gravitational unit of force can be defined. Kilogram-force or kgf is the most commonly used standard unit.

1 kgf is the weight of a mass of 1 kg at a place where the acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.80665 m · s-2, and

therefore 1 kgf = 1 kg x 9.80665 m · s-2 = 9.80665 N .

However, this unit has become almost obsolete at present.

Inertial Mass: Suppose, two small pieces, one of wood and the other of iron, are at rest on the floor. From experience, we know that, on applying the same amount of force, the piece of wood will have an acceleration greater than that of the iron piece.

  • Conversely, to produce the same acceleration on both pieces, the force applied on the iron piece will have to be greater. So, the inertia of rest for the iron piece is more than that for the piece of wood. Thus, the mass of a body is a measure of inertia of rest.
  • This is also true for the inertia of motion. For instance, to stop a bicycle and a truck, moving with the same velocity within the same distance, i.e., to produce the same retardation, the force applied on the truck has to be greater. So, in this case, too, the masses of the vehicles give a measure of their inertia of motion.

Therefore, to produce the same acceleration in any two different objects, at rest or in motion, force required will be different if their masses are unequal. Thus, the mass of an object is the measure of its inertia. So mass is also called Inertial mass. The mass m in the equation \(\vec{F}=m \vec{a}\), is the inertial mass.

Newton Law Of Motion Weigt Of Body Numerical Examples

Example 1. A paratrooper of mass 75 kg falls with a constant velocity. Find the air resistance acting on him.
Solution:

Given

A paratrooper of mass 75 kg falls with a constant velocity.

As the acceleration is zero, there is no resultant force acting on the paratrooper. The weight acting downwards = 75 x 9.8 = 735 N.

Therefore, the air resistance, acting upwards, is R = 735 N.

Newton Law Of Motion – Analysis Of Different Motions

WBBSE Class 11 Newton’s Laws of Motion Notes

Walking On A Horizontal Plane: AB is a horizontal plane. A man wants to walk on the plane towards B. He applies an oblique force F on the plane. The plane too, exerts a reaction force R on the man.

  • The vertical component of R acts opposite to the weight of the man and the horizontal component H provides the force for the forward movement. So, the motion of the man is not directly due to the force F that he exerts, but due to the opposite reaction.
  • In fact, this force decides the type of the motion. As the frictional force is low on a smooth surface, it is not possible to exert a large force. If the horizontal component of F becomes much larger than the frictional force, the man may slip.
  • Hence one cannot walk fast on a very smooth surface as there is a high chance of slipping.

Newtons Law Of Motion Walking On A Horizontal Plane

Flight Of Birds: If a bird intends to fly along OC, it flaps its wings along OA and OB, thus exerting some force on the air. At the same time, the reaction forces on the bird are OE and OD.

  • If both the wings of the bird exert equal force on air, the resultant reaction force will be along OC. The bird moves forward due to this reaction force.
  • By adjusting the force applied by the wings, the resultant may be shifted to the left or right of the direction of OC, and the bird can thus change its course.
  • In the absence of air, i.e., in a vacuum, the reaction forces OD and OE cannot be generated, and so birds cannot fly.

Newtons Law Of Motion Flight Of Birds

Motion Of A Hand-Pulled Rickshaw: A man is trying to pull a rickshaw on a horizontal plane, towards point B. He exerts an oblique force P on the plane. The reaction R of the plane has a vertical component N and a horizontal component F. Force N is balanced by the weight of the man. Horizontal component F sets up the motion of the man.

Newtons Law Of Motion Motion Of A Hand Pulled Rickshaw

  • Let the force exerted by the man on the handles of the rickshaw be T. The rickshaw also pulls the man backward with the same force T.
  • Due to the motion of the wheel on the plane, frictional force F’ acts at the point of contact of the wheel and the plane in a direction opposing the motion.
  • Hence, the resultant of forces acting on the man = F- T in the forward direction and that on the rickshaw in the same direction = T-F’
  • Let the masses of the man and the rickshaw be m1 and m2 respectively and common acceleration in the forward direction be a.

For the man, F- T = m1a or, T = F-m1a

For the rickshaw, \(T-F^{\prime}=m_2 a \text { or, } T=F^{\prime}+m_2 a\)

∴ \(F-m_1 a=F^{\prime}+m_2 a \text { or, }\left(m_1+m_2\right) a=F-F^{\prime}\)

or, \(a=\frac{F-F^{\prime}}{\left(m_1+m_2\right)}\)

The expression for the acceleration shows that,

  1. Individual masses m1 or m2 are not significant but the sum of the masses (m1 + m2) matters,
  2. The rickshaw will start moving, i.e., Accelerating when F> T>F’,
  3. During the early stages of motion, F > T > F’. It attains a uniform speed when F =T= F’ and then of course a = 0, and
  4. If F< F’, the rickshaw cannot be set into motion at all.

There are many similar examples in nature, where a force (action) is applied backward, and the reaction force generated is actually responsible for the intended forward motion.

Newton Law Of Motion – Equation Of Motion And Its Solution

Key Concepts of Newton’s Laws for Class 11

The body, whose motion is to be analyzed, should be identified at first.

  1. This ‘‘body” may consist of a single body a combination of bodies (often called a system of bodies’) or even a part of a single body.
  2. Then we have to consider the surroundings (or environment). Every other body having a direct influence on our chosen body is a part of the surroundings. In general, action-reaction-type forces act between the body and its surroundings.
  3. Now we search for every force acting on our body. Each of the forces is either a force of action on the body or a force of reaction on it due to some other body in the surroundings.
  4. Once the forces are identified, we regard them on the same footing, i.e., we no longer differentiate between actions and reactions. In this sense, the body under consideration acts as a free body, subject to a system of forces acting on it.
  5. If the active forces are \(\vec{F}_1, \vec{F}_2, \vec{F}_3, \cdots\), then the resultant or net force is \(\vec{F}=\vec{F}_1+\vec{F}_2+\vec{F}_3+\cdots\)

For a body of constant mass m, we get from Newton’s 2nd law, m \(\vec{a}=\vec{F}=\vec{F}_1+\vec{F}_2+\vec{F}_3+\cdots\)…(1)

This equation (1) is to be solved to find out the acceleration \(\vec{a}\) of the body.

As \(\vec{a}\) is related to the velocity \(\vec{v}\) as \(\vec{a}\) = \(\frac{d \vec{v}}{d t}\), equation (1) may be written as \(m \frac{d \vec{v}}{d t}=\vec{F}\)…(2)

Clearly, this is the differential equation to be solved if the velocity of the body is to be found. Similarly, as \(\vec{v}=\frac{d \vec{r}}{d t}\)(\(\vec{r}\) = position vector of the body), we may write m \(\frac{d^2 \vec{r}}{d t^2}=\vec{F}\)…(3)

This 2nd-order differential equation is to be solved to obtain \(\vec{r}\) at any instant.

Any of the equations (1) to (3) is then called the equation of motion of a body.

It is to be noted that the equation of motion is a vector equation. Each vector has three independent components. So the solution of an equation of motion involves, in general, a solution of three independent equations corresponding to three mutually orthogonal coordinate axes.

However, this is not always the case we come across plenty of examples of one or two-dimensional motions where one or two equations, respectively, are relevant.

Newton Law Of Motion Problems On Tension

Horizontal Motion With The Help Of A Smooth Pulley: A body A of mass m is resting on a frictionless horizontal plane. To set body A into motion along the plane, it is tied, using a massless, inextensible string passing over a massless, frictionless pulley, with another m body B of mass M as shown.

Newtons Law Of Motion Horizontal Motion With With Help Of Smooth Pulley

Both the bodies, A and B, get the same constant acceleration and the tension in the string remains constant (as the pulley is frictionless).

Let the tension in the string = T; acceleration produced = a

∴ For the motion of A, T = ma …(1)

For the downward motion of B, Mg- T = Ma ….(2)

From (1) and (2), (M+ m)a = Mg

or, a = \(\frac{M}{M+m^g} g\)…(3)

As, \(\frac{M}{M+m}<1, a<g\), though the surface and the pulley are frictionless.

Also, inserting the value of an in equation (1) we get, T = \(\frac{M m}{M+m^2} g=\frac{M}{1+\frac{M}{m}^g}\)

Here, \(\frac{M}{1+\frac{M}{m}}<M\), and hence T < mg, i.e., the tension in the string is less than the weight of the body B.

Vertical Motion With The Help Of A Smooth Pulley; To raise a body A of mass m vertically, a heavy body B of mass M is connected to A using a massless inextensible string passing over a massless smooth frictionless pulley as shown.

Newtons Law Of Motion Vertical Motion With The Help Of A Smooth Pulley

Let the tension developed in the string be T and the common acceleration of A and B be a. Mass of B is more than that of A. Hence B will move downwards, A will move upwards.

Considering the motion of B, Mg – T = Ma …(1)

and the motion of A, T – mg = ma …(2)

Adding equations (1) and (2), (M- m)g = (M+ m)a

or, a = \(\frac{M-m}{M+m} g\)…(3)

From (3), a < g though the pulley is smooth.

Again, inserting the value of an in (1),

T = \(M g-\frac{M(M-m)}{M+m} g=M g\left(1-\frac{M-m}{M+m}\right)\)

= \(\frac{2 M m}{M+m^2} g\)…(4)

The value of a in equation (3) is positive (i.e., acceleration of A is upwards), if M> m, i.e., if the mass of B is more than that of A. As M > m, we get from equation (4), T> mg and T< Mg, i.e., the tension in the string is more than the weight of A (mg), but less than the weight of B. The net force on the pulley,

2T = \(\frac{4 M m}{M+m} g\)…(5)

Newton Law Of Motion Problems On Tension Numerical Examples

Short Answer Questions on Newton’s Laws

Example 1. A block of mass m2 = 100 g is suspended from one end of an inextensible string. The other end of the string is tied to another block of mass m1 = 200 g, kept on a frictionless table surface. The string passes over a pulley. Find the tension in the string and the acceleration of the blocks.

Newtons Law Of Motion Inextensible Spring

Solution:

Given

A block of mass m2 = 100 g is suspended from one end of an inextensible string. The other end of the string is tied to another block of mass m1 = 200 g, kept on a frictionless table surface. The string passes over a pulley.

Let the tension in the string = T, and the acceleration of each block be a.

So, the equations of motion of the two blocks are, T = m1a and m2g – T = m2a

On adding the two equations, we get, m2g = m1a + m2a

or, \(a=\frac{m_2}{m_1+m_2} \cdot g=\frac{100}{200+100} \times 980=326.7 \mathrm{~cm} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-2}\)

and T = m1a  = 200 x 326.7 = 65340 dyn.

Example 2. Two blocks of masses 2.9 kg and 1.9 kg are suspended from a rigid support, using two inextensible wires, each of length 1 m, as shown. The mass of the upper string is negligible and that of the lower string is 0.2 kg • m-1. If the whole system is moving up with an acceleration of 0.2 ms-2, find

  1. The tension at the midpoint of the lower string and
  2. The tension at the midpoint of the upper string.Acceleration due to gravity = 9.8 m · s-2.

Newtons Law Of Motion Two Blocks Of Masses Are Suspended Using Two Inextensible Wires

Solution:

Given

Two blocks of masses 2.9 kg and 1.9 kg are suspended from a rigid support, using two inextensible wires, each of length 1 m, as shown. The mass of the upper string is negligible and that of the lower string is 0.2 kg • m-1.

1. Mass of the lower string =0.2 x 1 = 0.2 kg. Its midpoint is B, and so the total mass hanging from B, \( m_B=\left (1.9+\frac{0.2}{2}\right)=2 \mathrm{~kg} \text {. }\)

Hence, downward force at B = mBg

Upward force at B = TB

So applying Newton’s 2nd law of motion for the mass below B, mBa = TB– mBg

or, TB = mBa + mBg = mB(a + g)

= 2(0.2 + 9.8) = 20 N

2. Midpoint of the upper string is A; total mass hanging below A, mA = 2.9 + 0.2 + 1.9 =5.0 kg.

Hence, downward force at A = mAg

Upward force at A = TA

Hence applying Newton’s 2nd law of motion for the whole system, mAa = TA– mAg

or, TA = mA(g+ a) = 5(9.8 + 0.2) = 50 N

Example 3. Two bodies of mass 7 kg and 5 kg 200 N are joined with a rope of mass 4 kg. An upward force of 200 N is applied on the upper body. Find

  1. The acceleration of the system,
  2. Tension at the top end of the rope and
  3. Tension at the midpoint of the rope.

Newtons Law Of Motion Two Bodies Of Masses Are Joined With A Rope Of Mass

Solution:

Let the acceleration be a.

1. From Newton’s 2nd law, 16a = 200- 16g or, 16a = 200- 16 x 9.8

∴ a = 2.7 m · s-2.

2. The upper end of the rope carries the masses of the second body and the rope. If the tension is T, then T- (4 + 5)g = (4 + 5)a

or, T =9(g+ a) =9(9.8 + 2.7) =112.5 N.

3. The mass carried by the midpoint of the rope is half the mass of the rope and the whole mass of the lower body. Hence, if the tension is T’ at the midpoint, the equation of motion is T’-(2 + 5)g= (2 + 5)a

or, T’ = 7(g+ a) = 7(9.8 + 2.7) = 87.5 N.

Example 4. A double inclined— plane A is placed on a horizontal table and two blocks of masses m1 and m2 are placed on the two frictionless inclined planes of A. Two ends of a rope wound over a pulley are tied to the two blocks. Find out the horizontal acceleration to be imparted to the system so that the blocks are at rest relative to A. In this condition, what will be the tension in the rope?

Newtons Law Of Motion Doubled Inclined Plane

Solution:

Given

A double inclined— plane A is placed on a horizontal table and two blocks of masses m1 and m2 are placed on the two frictionless inclined planes of A. Two ends of a rope wound over a pulley are tied to the two blocks.

Let the tension in the rope be T and the horizontal acceleration be a .

The forces acting on the two blocks have been shown. They are at rest relative to A, if

∴ \(T-m_2 g \sin \beta-m_2 a \cos \beta=0\)…(1)

∴ \(T-m_1 g \sin \alpha+m_1 a \cos \alpha=0\)…(2)

Subtracting (2) from (1), we get, \(g\left(m_1 \sin \alpha-m_2 \sin \beta\right)=a\left(m_1 \cos \alpha+m_2 \cos \beta\right)\)

or, \(a=\frac{m_1 \sin \alpha-m_2 \sin \beta}{m_1 \cos \alpha+m_2 \cos \beta} \times g\)

∴ T = \(m_2 a \cos \beta+m_2 g \sin \beta\)

= \(m_2 g\left[\frac{m_1 \sin \alpha-m_2 \sin \beta}{m_1 \cos \alpha+m_2 \cos \beta} \cdot \cos \beta+\sin \beta\right]\)

= \(\frac{m_1 m_2 \sin (\alpha+\beta)}{m_1 \cos \alpha+m_2 \cos \beta} g .\)

Class 11 Physics Class 12 Maths Class 11 Chemistry
NEET Foundation Class 12 Physics NEET Physics

Newton Law Of Motion Reaction In A Moving Lift Apparent Weight

Newton’s First Law Explained for Class 11

When a person of mass m stands on a floor, a downward force mg acts on the floor due to his weight. At the same time, the floor exerts an upward reaction force or normal force R on the man.

  • As R acts on the person, the person feels his weight. From the third law of motion, R = mg.
  • So, in this case, the actual weight mg, and the normal reaction, R, is the same. If the normal force R is absent, the person feels weightless.
  • For example, while jumping from a height, one feels weightless before touching the earth’s surface, because the normal force R is absent.
  • The normal force R varies inside a lift due to its vertical motion. The floor of the lift, in this case, provides the reaction. A person feels lighter or heavier than his actual weight depending on the reaction force R. This is called apparent weight.

Let the mass of a man in a lift be m.

Newtons Law Of Motion Reaction In A Moving Lift

The downward attractive force acting on him = real weight = mg

The upward normal force of the floor – apparent weight = R

∴ The net upward force F = R- mg.

We can determine the apparent weight R using F = ma for different types of motion of the lift.

1. The Lift Is Moving Up With An Acceleration a(Or, Moving Down With A Retardation a): Here the upward acceleration is a.

∴ R- mg = ma

or, R = mg+ ma = m(g+ a)….(1)

∴  As R> mg, the man feels heavier.

2. The Lift Is Moving Down With An Acceleration a(Or, Moving Up With A Retardation a): Here the downward acceleration = a or upward acceleration =-a (here a < g).

∴ R- mg = -ma

or, R = m(g- a)…(2)

He feels lighter as m(g- a) < mg.

3. The Cable Of The Lift Snaps And The Lift With The Man, Falls Freely Due To Gravitational Pull: Here, the acceleration, a = g. Hence from (2),

R = m(g- g) = 0…(3)

As no normal force acts on the man, he feels weightless.

This apparent weightlessness is true for all freely falling bodies.

4. The Lift Is At Rest Or In Uniform Motion: The value of a is zero and so the reaction force, R = mg. Hence, the apparent weight is the same as the real or true weight.

5. The Lift Falls With A Downward Acceleration Greater Than g: Here, a > g. From equation (2), R = m(g-a) or, R = -m(a- g).

Newtons Law Of Motion Lift Falls With A Downward Acceleration Greater Than g

The negative sign indicates that the apparent weight is negative, i.e., it is directed upwards. The man thus loses contact with the floor and hits the ceiling of the lift. Any item on the floor of the lift will hit the roof when exposed to similar conditions. This is termed as super-weightlessness.

Newton Law Of Motion – Reaction In A Moving Lift Apparent Weight Numerical Examples

Example 1. A body of mass 1 kg is suspended from a spring balance calibrated for acceleration due to gravity of 10 m · s-2. What is the reading on the spring balance when the system

  1. Is ascending with an acceleration of 5 m · s-2 and
  2. Is descending with the same acceleration? [g = 10 m · s-2]

Solution:

Given

A body of mass 1 kg is suspended from a spring balance calibrated for acceleration due to gravity of 10 m · s-2.

1. Reaction force on the balance when it ascends, R = m(g+ a) = 1(10 + 5) = 15 N.

∴ In this case, the reading of the spring balance = 15/100 = 1.5 kg

Reaction force when the system descends, R = m(g – a) =1(10-5) = 5N.

∴ In this case, the reading of the spring balance = 5/10 = 0.5 kg

Example 2. A man of 50 kg is standing on a weighing machine in a lift. As the lift moves with a constant acceleration, the weighing machine registers the man’s weight as 45 kg. State whether the lift is ascending or descending. Give reasons for your answer. What is the acceleration of the lift? [g = 9.8 m · s-2]
Solution:

Given

A man of 50 kg is standing on a weighing machine in a lift. As the lift moves with a constant acceleration, the weighing machine registers the man’s weight as 45 kg.

The weighing machine shows a reading lower than the real weight of the man. So, the lift is descending with an acceleration, because in such cases, apparent weight R = m(g- a) < mg.

The downward acceleration, a = \(g-\frac{R}{m}=9.8-\frac{45 \times 9.8}{50}=0.98 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-2}\)

Example 3. A man of mass 70 kg is sitting in a motor car. The car is moving with an acceleration of 5 m · s-2. What is the gravitational force on the man? [g = 9.8 m s-2]

Newtons Law Of Motion Man Of Mass Is Sitting In Motor Car

Solution:

Given

A man of mass 70 kg is sitting in a motor car. The car is moving with an acceleration of 5 m · s-2.

Let the horizontal acceleration of the car be \(\vec{a}\).

The apparent acceleration due to gravity with respect to the car, \(\vec{g}^{\prime}=\vec{g}-\vec{a}=[\vec{g}+(-\vec{a})]\)

which is the resultant of the vectors \(\vec{g}\) and –\(\vec{a}\).

From, \(g^{\prime}=\sqrt{g^2+a^2}=\sqrt{(9.8)^2+5^2}\)

= \(11 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-2}\)

Force of gravitation on the man =70 x 11 = 770 N,

which acts in the direction of g’.

[The apparent weight of the man is, W’ = \(\frac{770}{9.8}\) = 78.6 kg]

The force of gravity, acting on the man, remains constant but, because of acceleration, the man feels a greater pull of gravity.

Example 4. A man of mass 60 kg is standing in a lift at rest. What will be the reaction force on the man when the lift is

  1. Stationary,
  2. Moving up with an acceleration of 4.9 m · s-2,
  3. Moving up at a constant speed, and
  4. Moving up with a retardation of 4.9 m · s-2? [G = 9.8 m · s-2]

Solution:

1. The reaction of the lift floor when the lift is stationary R = mg = 60 x 9.8 N = 588 N.

2. The lift is moving up with an acceleration, of a = 4.9 m · s-2.

Reaction, R=m(g+a) =60(9.8 + 4.9) N =882N,

3. When the lift is moving up at a constant speed, a = 0.

∴ R = mg =60 x 9.8 N = 588 N.

4. When the  lift moves up with a retardation of 4.9 m · s-2,

R = m[g+ (-a)] = m(g- a) = 60(9.8- 4.9) N = 294 N

Example 5. A man of mass 98 kg, is standing on a weighing machine in a lift. What will be the readings of the weighing machine in the following cases:

  1. The lift ascends at 100 cm per second,
  2. The lift descends with an acceleration of 30 cm · s-2. [g= 980 cm · s-2]

Solution:

Given

A man of mass 98 kg, is standing on a weighing machine in a lift.

1. When the lift ascends with uniform velocity (acceleration a = 0 ) then, R = mg = 98 x 9.8 N.

Reading of the weighing machine = \(\frac{98 \times 9.8}{9.8} \mathrm{~kg}=98 \mathrm{~kg} .\)

2. When the lift descends, R = m(g- a)

= 98(9.8-0.3) [30 cm · s-2 = 0.3 m · s-2]

= 98 x 9.5 N

∴ Reading of the weighing machine = \(\frac{98 \times 9.5}{9.8} \mathrm{~kg}=95 \mathrm{~kg} .\)

Example 6. A man weighing 60 kg is in a lift that descends with an acceleration of 4 cm · s-2. What force will the man exert on the floor of the lift? If the lift begins to ascend with the same acceleration, what reaction force will act on the man? For what acceleration of the lift, while descending, will the man experience weightlessness? [g = 980 cm · s-2]
Solution:

Given

A man weighing 60 kg is in a lift that descends with an acceleration of 4 cm · s-2.

If the lift descends with an acceleration a, and if the reaction force exerted by the lift on the man in the upward direction is R, then mg- R = ma …(1)

The force exerted by the man on the lift’s floor, R = mg – ma [4cm · s-2 = 0.04m · s-2] = 60(9.8-0.04) = 585.6 N

If the lift ascends with the same acceleration, then the reaction force on the man is, R’ = mg+ ma [4 cm · s-2 = 0.04 m · s-2]

= 60(9.8 + 0.04) = 590.4 N

When the acceleration of the lift, while descending, is a = g, then from equation (1), we get, R = mg- mg = 0 . For this zero reaction force, the man feels weightless.

So, for a lift falling freely with an acceleration g, the man inside it will feel no weight.

Example 7. A lift of mass 200 kg is moving up with an acceleration of 4 m · s-2. What is the tension in the lift cable? If the lift moves down with the same acceleration, what will be the tension in that case? [g = 9.8 m · s-2]
Solution:

Given

A lift of mass 200 kg is moving up with an acceleration of 4 m · s-2.

Let the tension in the cable be T when the lift is moving with an acceleration a.

The equation of motion for the lift is, T- mg = ma

or, T = m(g+a)…(1)

Newtons Law Of Motion Lift Of Mass Moving Up With An Acceleration

Substituting the values for m, g, and a in equation (1), for upward motion,

T =200(9.8 + 4) = 200×13.8 = 2760 N

For the lift moving downwards, a = -4m · s-2,

T= 200(9.8-4) = 200×5.8 = 1160 N

Example 8. A lift of mass 2000 kg is supported by thick steel ropes. If the maximum upward acceleration of the lift be 1.2 m/s2, and the breaking stress for the ropes be 2.8 x 108 N/m2, what should be the minimum diameter of the rope?
Solution:

Given

A lift of mass 2000 kg is supported by thick steel ropes. If the maximum upward acceleration of the lift be 1.2 m/s2, and the breaking stress for the ropes be 2.8 x 108 N/m2,

Here, m = 2000 kg, a = 1.2 m/s2

Breaking stress =2.8 x 108 N/m2

Let the diameter of the rope be D.

When the lift moves upwards, the tension in the rope is T= m(g+ a) = 2000(9.8 + 1.2) = 22000 N.

Now, breaking stress = \(\frac{\text { force }}{\text { area }}=\frac{T}{\pi D^2 / 4}=\frac{4 T}{\pi D^2}\)

or, 2.8 x \(10^8=\frac{4 \times 22000 \times 7}{22 \times D^2}\)

or, \(D^2=\frac{4 \times 22000 \times 7}{22 \times 2.8 \times 10^8}=10^{-4} \quad \text { or, } D=1 \mathrm{~cm}\)

Newton Law Of Motion – Law Of Conservation Of Linear Momentum

Newton’s Second Law: Formulas and Applications

Newton’s second law of motion states that the rate of change of momentum of a body is directly proportional to the applied force. Hence, in the absence of an external force, there is no change in the momentum of a body.

This law is also applicable for a system consisting of a number of bodies. The members in a many-body system may have interactions among themselves due to collisions, attractions, repulsions, etc. These forces are to be treated as internal forces, not external forces.

Law Of Conservation Of Linear Momentum Statement: In the absence of any external force acting on a system of bodies, even if interactions exist among the bodies, the total linear momentum of the system remains constant.

  • This statement is the law of conservation of linear momentum. For a system of bodies, we can calculate the components of linear momentum, of all the bodies present, in any chosen direction. The stun of these individual components in this direction will be a constant.
  • We shall illustrate the law for a one-dimensional collision. Suppose two particles of mass m1 and m2, moving with velocities u1 and u2 respectively in a straight line, collide with each other. After the collision, the particles move with velocities v1 and v2 respectively in the same direction.

Newtons Law Of Motion Law Of Conservation Lineaar Momentum

Hence, total momentum before collision =m1u1 + m2u2, and total momentum after collision =m1v1 + m2v2.

If there is no external force, as per the conservation law of linear momentum, m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2…….(1)

Law Of Conservation Of Linear Momentum From Newton’s Third Law Of Motion: In the absence of any external force, two bodies, during a collision, exert an impulsive force on each other. From Newton’s third law of motion, impulsive force on the first body is equal and opposite to that exerted on the second body.

Forces F12 and F21 are shown: F21 = -F12

If the collision lasts for a time t, the impulse of F21 on the first body = F21 • t = change of momentum of the first body = m1u1– m2u2

Similarly, impulse of F12 on the second body = F12 x t = change of momentum of the second body = \(m_2 v_2-m_2 u_2\)

As \(F_{21}=-F_{12}, \quad m_1 v_1-m_1 u_1=-\left(m_2 v_2-m_2 u_2\right)\)

or, \(m_1 u_1+m_2 u_2=m_1 v_1+m_2 v_2\)

As total momentum before collision = total momentum after collision, the total linear momentum remains conserved.

Alternative Method: Suppose two bodies of masses m1 and m2, moving along the same straight line with velocities v1 and v2 respectively, collide with each other.

Since there is no external force present, let the force on the first body exerted by the second body be F21, and that on the second body exerted by the first body be F12.

∴ \(a_1=\frac{d v_1}{d t} \text { and } a_2=\frac{d v_2}{d t}\) = are the respective accelerations of the bodies.

From Newton’s third law of motion, \(F_{21}=-F_{12}\)

or, \(m_1 \frac{d v_1}{d t}=-m_2 \frac{d v_2}{d t}\)

or, \(\frac{d}{d t}\left(m_1 v_1+m_2 v_2\right)=0 or, \quad m_1 v_1+m_2 v_2\)= constant

Hence, the total linear momentum remains conserved.

Newton’s Third Law Of Motion From The Law Of Conservation Of Linear Momentum: Let the initial momentum of two bodies be p1 and p2. They come in contact for a time t and their momenta change to p1‘ and p2‘ respectively.

In the absence of any external force, as per law of conservation of linear momentum, \(p_1+p_2=p_1^{\prime}+p_2^{\prime}\)

or, \(p_1^{\prime}-p_1=-p_2^{\prime}+p_2 \quad \text { or, } \frac{p_1^{\prime}-p_1}{t}=-\frac{p_2^{\prime}-p_2}{t}\)

The left-hand side of the equation is the rate of change of the momentum of the first body = force on the first body = F21; similarly, the right-hand side is -F12.

Hence F21 = -F21 or, action = – reaction.

So action and reaction between two bodies are equal and opposite. This is nothing but Newton’s third law of motion.

Practical Applications Of The Principle Of Conservation Of Linear Momentum:

1. Recoil Of A Gun: When a bullet is fired from a gun, the gun recoils or gives a kick in the backward direction. It can be explained as follows:

  • let m1 be the mass of the bullet and m2 be the mass of the gun. Initially, both the gun and the bullet are at rest. On firing the gun, let the bullet move with a velocity \(\vec{v}_1\), and the gun move with a velocity \(\vec{v}_2\).
  • According to the principle of conservation of linear momentum, the total momentum of gun and bullet before firing = total momentum of gun and bullet after firing.

Newtons Law Of Motion Recoil Of A Gun

i.e., 0 = \(m_1 \vec{\nu}_1+m_2 \vec{\nu}_2 \quad \text { or, } \vec{\nu}_2=-\frac{m_1}{m_2} \vec{v}_1\)

  • The negative sign shows that \(\vec{v}_2\) and \(\vec{v}_2\) are in opposite directions, i.e., as the bullet moves forward, the gun will move in backward direction. This backward motion of the gun is called the recoil of the gun.
  • Hence, while firing a bullet, the gun must be held tight to the shoulder otherwise, because of the recoil velocity of the gun, the shoulder of the man who fires the gun, may get hurt.
  • If the gun is held tight to the shoulder then the gun and the body of the man recoil as a single system. As the mass is quite large, the recoil velocity will be very small and the shoulder of the man will not get hurt.

2. Explosion Of A Bomb: Let a bomb of mass M be initially at rest. So, the initial momentum = 0.

After the explosion, suppose that the bomb is split into a few fragments of masses m1, m2, m3 ……; the fragments fly away from the center of the explosion with velocities \(\vec{v}_1\), \(\vec{v}_2\), \(\vec{v}_3\)…

Thus, the final momentum is,\(\vec{p}=\vec{p}_1+\vec{p}_2+\vec{p}_3+\cdots=m_1 \vec{v}_1+m_2 \vec{v}_2+m_3 \vec{v}_3+\cdots\)

As no external force acts on the bomb, the momentum must be conserved, i.e., final momentum = initial momentum, or, \(\vec{p}=\vec{p}_1+\vec{p}_2+\vec{p}_3\)+….. = 0

As a special case, if the bomb explodes into two fragments only, then \(\vec{p}_1+\vec{p}_2=0 \text {, or } m_1 \vec{v}_1+m_2 \vec{v}_2=0 \text {, or } m_1 \vec{v}_1=-m_2 \vec{v}_2\)

Again, if the two fragments are of equal mass, \(m_1=m_2 \text { then } \vec{v}_1=-\vec{v}_2\)

Hence, the two fragments would acquire equal and opposite velocities due to the explosion.

Newton Law Of Motion – Law Of Conservation Of Linear Momentum Numerical Examples

Example 1. A bullet of mass 6 g is fired with a velocity of 500 m s-1 from a gun of mass 4 kg. Find the recoil velocity of the gun.
Solution:

Given

A bullet of mass 6 g is fired with a velocity of 500 m s-1 from a gun of mass 4 kg.

As the bullet and the gun were at rest before the firing, the initial momentum of the system was zero. Let the speed of the bullet after the firing be v, and that of the gun be V.

From the law of conservation of linear momentum, 0 = MV+ mv

[mass of the bullet = m , mass of the gun = M]

or, \(V=-\frac{m}{M} \nu=-\frac{6 \times 10^{-3}}{4} \times 500=-0.75 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

Hence, the recoil velocity of the gun = 0.75 m · s-1.

Example 2. While firing a bullet of mass 8 g, the recoil velocity of the gun of mass 5 kg becomes 64 cm · s-1. The bullet penetrates 50 cm through a target and then stops. Express the average resistance on the bullet in Newton.
Solution:

Given

While firing a bullet of mass 8 g, the recoil velocity of the gun of mass 5 kg becomes 64 cm · s-1. The bullet penetrates 50 cm through a target and then stops.

The initial momenta of the gun and the bullet were zero, as both were at rest. Let the masses of the gun and the bullet be M and m respectively and the respective velocities after firing be V and v.

From the law of conservation of Linear momentum, 0 = MV+ mu

∴ \(\nu=-\frac{M}{m} V=-\frac{5}{8 \times 10^{-3}} \times 0.64=-400 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

The bullet comes to rest after penetrating a distance of 50 cm or 0.5 m. If the retardation is due to the resistance of the material of the target, 0 = (400)² – 2a · 0.5 or, a = 16 x 104 m · s-2

Hence, average resistance, F = ma = 0.008 x 16 x 104 = 1280 N.

Example 3. A body of mass m moving with velocity V along the X-axis collides with another mass M moving with velocity v along the Y-axis. The masses coalesce after the collision. Find the velocity and the direction of motion of the combined mass.
Solution:

Given

A body of mass m moving with velocity V along the X-axis collides with another mass M moving with velocity v along the Y-axis. The masses coalesce after the collision.

Let the velocity of the combined mass be u which makes an angle θ with the X- axis.

Applying the law of conservation of linear momentum along the X-axis, mV+ 0 = (m + M)u cosθ…(1)

Similarly, along Y-axis, 0 + Mv = (m + M)u sinθ…(2)

Newtons Law Of Motion A Body Of mass Moving With Velocity Along X Axis

Squaring and adding (1) and (2), \(m^2 V^2+M^2 v^2=(m+M)^2 u^2\)

or, \(u^2=\frac{m^2 V^2+M^2 v^2}{(m+M)^2}\)

Hence, u = \(\frac{\sqrt{m^2 V^2+M^2 v^2}}{M+m}\)

Also, (2) ÷ (1) gives, \(\tan \theta=\frac{M v}{m V} \text { or, } \theta=\tan ^{-1} \frac{M v}{m V} .\)

Example 4. A body of mass 50 kg is projected vertically upwards with a velocity of 100 m s-1. After 5 s it splits up into two parts due to an explosion. One part of mass 20 kg moves vertically upwards with a velocity of 150 m s-1. Find the velocity of the second body. Find the sum of the momenta of the two parts 3 s after the explosion and show that if there was no explosion, the momentum of the body would have been constant.
Solution:

Given

A body of mass 50 kg is projected vertically upwards with a velocity of 100 m s-1. After 5 s it splits up into two parts due to an explosion. One part of mass 20 kg moves vertically upwards with a velocity of 150 m s-1.

Let the velocity of the projectile 5 s after the projection and just before the explosion be v.

∴ v = 100- 9.8 x 5 = 51 m · s-1

Let the velocity of the second part after the explosion be v1.

Applying the law of conservation of linear momentum along the direction of projection, 50 x 51 = 20 x 150 + 30 x v1.

or, \(v_1=\frac{50 \times 51-3000}{30}=-15 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1} \text { (downwards) }\)

Let the velocity of the 20 kg mass, produced due to the explosion, 3 seconds after the explosion be v’.

∴ v’ = 150- 9.8 x 3

= 150-29.4 = 120.6 m · s-1 (upwards)

If v” is the velocity of the 30 kg mass 3 seconds after the explosion, then v” =15 + 9.8×3

= 15 + 29.4 = 44.4 m · s-1 (downwards)

Thus the total momentum 3 seconds after the explosion = 20 x 120.6- 30 x 44.4 = 1080 kg · m · s-1

In the case of no explosion, the velocity after 8 seconds of projection would have been v2 = 100-9.8×8 = 100-78.4 = 21.6 m · s-1

Hence, its momentum after 8 s would have been 50 x 21.6 = 1080 kg · m ·  s-1

Example 5. A body P of mass 20 g and another body Q of mass 40 g are projected at the same time from points A A and B on the earth’s surface. The velocity of projection for each was 49 m · s-1 and it was directed at an angle of 45° with the horizontal. Distance AB = 245 m. P and Q collide on the same vertical plane. After the collision, P retraces its path to the ground. Find the position where Q touches the ground. How long will Q take to reach the ground after the collision? [g = 9.8 m · s-2]

Newtons Law Of Motion A Body Of Mass And Another Body Of Mass

Solution:

Given

A body P of mass 20 g and another body Q of mass 40 g are projected at the same time from points A A and B on the earth’s surface. The velocity of projection for each was 49 m · s-1 and it was directed at an angle of 45° with the horizontal. Distance AB = 245 m. P and Q collide on the same vertical plane. After the collision, P retraces its path to the ground.

As the two bodies P and Q are projected at the same time with the same velocity u = 49 m · s-1 and angle = 45°, the horizontal range for both P and Q is the same an equal to, \(\frac{u^2 \sin 2 \alpha}{g}=\frac{(49)^2 \times \sin 90^{\circ}}{9.8}=245 \mathrm{~m} .\)

Hence the two bodies P and Q will meet at a point on the perpendicular bisector of AB.

Let the time when P and Q meet after projection be t. Hence horizontal distance moved by each x = \(49 \cos 45^{\circ} \times t=\frac{245}{2}, \quad \text { or, } t=\frac{5}{\sqrt{2}} \mathrm{~s}\)

During the collision, the vertical velocity of P and Q \(u_y=u \sin 45^{\circ}-g t=\frac{49}{\sqrt{2}}-\frac{9.8 \times 5}{\sqrt{2}}=0\)

Horizontal velocity of P and Q \(u_x=u \cos 45^{\circ}=\frac{49}{\sqrt{2}} \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

Hence horizontal component of the total momentum before collision px = (0.02 ux – 0.04 ux) kg · m · s-1

P retraces its path after the collision. Hence horizontal velocity of P after collision =-ux and for Q it is = v (say).

Hence horizontal component of the total momentum of the system after the collision = (- 0.02 ux + 0.04 v) kg · m · s-1

From the law of conservation of momentum, 0.02 ux– 0.04 ux = (- 0.02 ux + 0.04 V)

or, v = 0

Thus Q does not have any horizontal component of velocity and hence it falls down vertically at the midpoint of AB, at a distance 245/2 = 122.5 m from both A and B

Let t = time required by Q to reach the ground after the collision.

t = \(\frac{u \sin 45^{\circ}}{g}=\frac{49 \times 1}{\sqrt{2} \times 9.8}=3.53 \mathrm{~s} .\)

Example 6. A car of mass 2000 kg collides with a truck of mass 104 kg moving at 48 km · h-1. After the collision, the car rides up the truck, and the truck-car combination moves at 15 km · h-1. What was the velocity of the car before the collision?
Solution:

Given

A car of mass 2000 kg collides with a truck of mass 104 kg moving at 48 km · h-1. After the collision, the car rides up the truck, and the truck-car combination moves at 15 km · h-1.

Suppose a body of mass m moving with velocity u collides along a straight line with a body of mass M and velocity v. After collision the two masses combine and move with velocity V. Applying the law of conservation of equal to, momentum, mu + mv = (m + M)V

or, mu = (m + M)V- Mv

or, \(u=\frac{m+M}{m} V-\frac{M}{m} v=\left(1+\frac{M}{m}\right) V-\frac{M}{m} v\).

Here \(m=2000 \mathrm{~kg}, v=48 \mathrm{~km} \cdot \mathrm{h}^{-1}, M=10000 \mathrm{~kg}\),

V = \(15 \mathrm{~km} \cdot \mathrm{h}^{-1}\)

∴ \(\frac{M}{m}=\frac{10000}{2000}=5\)

u = \((1+5) \times 15-5 \times 48=90-240=-150 \mathrm{~km} \cdot \mathrm{h}^{-1}\)

The negative sign indicates that before collision the car was moving in the direction opposite to that of the truck.

Example 7. A ball weighing 100 g was thrown vertically upwards with a velocity 49 m · s-1. At the same moment, another identical ball was dropped from a height of 98 m vertically above the first ball. After some time the two balls collided and got stuck together. This combined mass reached the ground finally. Determine how long the balls were in motion.
Solution:

Given

A ball weighing 100 g was thrown vertically upwards with a velocity 49 m · s-1. At the same moment, another identical ball was dropped from a height of 98 m vertically above the first ball. After some time the two balls collided and got stuck together. This combined mass reached the ground finally.

Let the height attained by the balls above the ground in time t1 be h when they collide with each other.

Analyzing the upward motion of the first ball, we get \(h=49 t_1-9.8 t_1^2 / 2\)…(1)

Analyzing the downward motion of the second ball, we get \(98-h=9.8 t_1^2 / 2\)…(2)

From equations (1) and (2), 98 = 49 t1 or, t1 = 2 s

At the time of collision, the velocity of the ball thrown in the upward direction is v1 and that of the ball thrown in the downward direction is v2.

∴ v1 = 49 -9.8 x 2 = 29.4 m · s-1(upward)

and v2 = 9.8 x 2 = 19.6 m · s-1 (downward)

After collision, the velocity of the combined mass is V. Then according to the law of conservation of momentum, 0.1 x 29.4- 0.1 x 19.6 = 2 x 0.1 x V

or, V = 4.9m · s-1 (upward)

From equation (1), we get h = 49 x 2- 9.8 x (2)²/2 = 78.4 m

Let the time taken by the combined mass to reach the ground be t2.

Then \(78.4=-4.9 t_2+9.8 \times t_2^2 / 2 \quad \text { or, } t_2^2-t_2-16=0\)

or, \(t_2=(1 \pm \sqrt{1+64}) / 2=4.53 \mathrm{~s}\) (because t Newton Law Of Motion0)

∴ Total time = \(t_1+t_2=2+4.53=6.53 \mathrm{~s} .\)

Example 8. A body of mass m is at rest on a smooth horizontal plane. A force F = kt is applied on the body making an angle α with the horizontal. In the equation of force, t is time and k is a constant. At the instant the object loses contact with the plane, how far will it move along the plane and what will be its velocity?
Solution:

Given

A body of mass m is at rest on a smooth horizontal plane. A force F = kt is applied on the body making an angle α with the horizontal. In the equation of force, t is time and k is a constant. At the instant the object loses contact with the plane

As F= kt, the force increases with time. The vertical component of the force = Fsinα.

The body loses contact with the plane when the vertical force equals the weight of the body, i.e., Fsinα = mg. Let the time after which the body loses contact be t0.

∴ Fsinα = kt0sinα = mg

Newtons Law Of Motion A Body Of Mass Is A Rest On A Smooth Horizontal Plane

∴ \(t_0=\frac{m g}{k \sin \alpha}\)

The horizontal component of the force F = Fcosα = ktcosα

Hence horizontal acceleration = \(\frac{k t \cos \alpha}{m}=\frac{d v_x}{d t}\)

∴ \(d v_x=\frac{k t \cos \alpha}{m} \cdot d t\)

Integrating, \(v_x=\frac{k \cos \alpha}{m} \frac{t^2}{2}+A\)…(1)

[where A = integration constant]

As the body starts from rest, at t = 0, v = 0.

Inserting this in equation (1), A = 0

∴ \(v_x=\frac{k \cos \alpha}{2 m} t^2\)…(2)

If the displacement along the plane is s, then \(v_x=\frac{d s}{d t}=\frac{k \cos \alpha}{2 m} t^2 \quad \text { or, } d s=\frac{k \cos \alpha}{2 m} t^2 d t\)

Integrating again, \(s=\frac{k \cos \alpha}{6 m} t^3+B\)…(3)

[where B = integration constant]

As at the initial moment, the displacement is zero, i.e., at t = 0, s = 0.

From equation (3), we get B = 0

Inserting the value of B in equation (3), \(s=\frac{k \cos \alpha}{6 m} r^3\)

Hence, displacement along the plane in time t0, \(s_0=\frac{k \cos \alpha}{6 m} t_0^3=\frac{k \cos \alpha}{6 m}\left(\frac{m g}{k \sin \alpha}\right)^3\)

or, \(s_0=\frac{m^2 g^3 \cos \alpha}{6 k^2 \sin ^3 \alpha}\) and corresponding velocity, \(v_0=\frac{k \cos \alpha}{2 m}\left(\frac{m g}{k \sin \alpha}\right)^2\)

∴ \(v_0=\frac{m g^2 \cos \alpha}{2 k \sin ^2 \alpha} .\)

Example 9. A cannonball of mass 50 kg is fired with a velocity of 40 m s-1 from a cannon of mass 1000 kg. What will be the recoil velocity of the cannon? If the force of friction between the surface and the wheels of the cannon is 1/10th of the weight of the cannon, how far will the cannon move before coming to rest? [Given, g = 10 m s-2].
Solution:

Given

A cannonball of mass 50 kg is fired with a velocity of 40 m s-1 from a cannon of mass 1000 kg. What will be the recoil velocity of the cannon? If the force of friction between the surface and the wheels of the cannon is 1/10th of the weight of the cannon

Let the velocity of the recoil of the cannon be V.

Hence, from the law of conservation of momentum \(0=m v+M V \quad \text { or, } V=-\frac{m v}{M}\)

Here, m = mass of the cannonball = 50 kg, v = its velocity = 40 m · s-1, and M = mass of the cannon = 1000 kg.

From given data, V \(=-\frac{50 \times 40}{1000}=-2 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

Hence, the recoil velocity of the cannon = 2 m · s-1 (backward).

Frictional force between the wheels and the land surface = 1/10 x 1000 x 10 = 1000N

∴ Retardation of the cannon = \(\frac{1000 \mathrm{~N}}{1000 \mathrm{~kg}}=1 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-2}\)

∴ Distance traveled by the cannon before coming to rest is, \(s=\frac{V^2}{2 a}=\frac{2^2}{2 \times 1}=2 \mathrm{~m}\)

Example 10. Four identical blocks, each of mass m, are connected as shown and are kept on a horizontal table. A force F Is applied on the first block. Find the tension in each string, neglecting friction.
Solution:

Given

Four identical blocks, each of mass m, are connected as shown and are kept on a horizontal table. A force F Is applied on the first block.

Let the acceleration of the system, on applying force F on the first block, be a. Let tension in the string connecting the 1st and the 2nd block be T1, 2nd, and that for the 3rd be T2 and for the 3rd and the 4th be T3.

Equations of motion for the

1st block, F- T1 = ma…(1)

2nd block, T1-T2 = ma……(2)

3rd block, T2-T3 = ma….(3)

and 4th block, T3 = ma …(4)

Since T3 = ma, T2 = ma+ T3 = 2ma and T1 = 3ma.

Newtons Law Of Motion Four Identical Blocks

Hence, applied force, F = ma+ T1 = 4 ma

Expressing the tensions in terms of the applied force F, we get \(T_1=\frac{3}{4} F, T_2=\frac{F}{2} \text { and } T_3=\frac{F}{4} \text {. }\)

Newton Law Of Motion – Motion Of An Object Or A System Of Objects With Variable Mass

The mass of an object or a system of objects may change with time. Newton’s second law of motion can be applied in this case only after taking into account the time-variation of mass.

  • Suppose you are cycling along a road with a uniform velocity, carrying your friend in the backseat. You ask your friend to get down by jumping from the running cycle.
  • Then you can realize that suddenly your velocity has increased a bit. The change of velocity would depend on the momentum with which your friend got down from the cycle.

Many examples of this type can be cited which are part of our day-to-day experience.

Equation Of Motion Of An Object Or A System Of Objects With Variable Mass: Let us suppose, at any moment t, the mass and velocity of an object (moving in a straight line) be m and v respectively and the external fixed net force acting on the object be F.

At that moment, another object of an infinitesimal mass dm moving in the same straight line with velocity u is added with the first one. As a result, after an infinitesimal interval of time, i.e., at the moment (f + dt), the mass of the system of objects becomes (m + dm), and let us assume that the velocity becomes (v + dv).

Newtons Law Of Motion Motion Of An object Or A System Of Objects

Now the initial and final momentum of the system of the objects would be respectively, p = mv+ udm….(1)

and p+dp = (m+ dm)(v+ dv)

= mv+ mdv+ vdm…….(2)

As the quantity dmdv is very very small, it is ignored.

So, change in momentum of the system of objects in time dt (p+ dp) – p = mv+ mdv+ vdm – mv- udm

or, dp = mdv-(u-v)dm

Therefore, according to Newton’s second law of motion, F = \(\frac{d p}{d t}=m \frac{d v}{d t}-(u-v) \frac{d m}{d t}\)

It is to be noted that, (u-v) is the relative velocity of dm with respect to m. Putting urel in place of (u – v) in equation (3) we get,

F = \(m \frac{d v}{d t}-u_{\text {rel }} \frac{d m}{d t} \quad \text { or, } F+u_{\text {rel }} \frac{d m}{d t}=m \frac{d v}{d t}\)…(4)

The resulting acceleration of the system is \(\frac{dv}{dt}\) = a.

So from equation (4), \(m a=F+u_{\mathrm{rel}} \frac{d m}{d t}\)….(5)

In the case of time-varying mass, equation (4) or (5) is the effective form of Newton’s second law of motion. Note that, due to time-variation of mass the last term in equation (5) is added to the familiar equation ma = F.

 Newton Law Of Motion – Rocket And Jet Plane

Rocket And Jet Plane Working Principle: A rocket or a jet plane works on the principle of conservation of momentum. In a rocket or a jet engine, there is a combustion chamber with a small aperture (exhaust) H at its rear end.

Newtons Law Of Motion Rocket Working Principle

Solid or liquid fuel is ignited in the chamber. As a result of combustion, a large amount of spent fuel, in gaseous form, escapes at a high velocity through the exhaust. This provides a forward thrust to the rocket.

Force On The Rocket And Acceleration: Suppose, at time t, m= mass of a rocket, and v= its velocity in an inertial frame of reference. So, initial momentum of the system, p = mv.

When fuel is burnt in the combustion chamber, a gas is formed. High pressure within the chamber forces the gas out of a nozzle at the back of the rocket. Let the gas eject at a constant speed u relative to the rocket (u is assumed to be constant); the actual speed with respect to the same inertial frame = (u + v).

Let, dm = mass of the gas ejected in time dt

m – dm = residual mass of the rocket

and, v+ dv = velocity of the rocket after time dt

Then, total momentum after time dt, p+ dp = (u+ v)dm + (m- dm)(v+ dv) = mv+ udm + mdv [ignoring the product dmdv]

So, the change of momentum in time dt, dp = (p+ dp) – p = udm + mdv

And, external force = rate of change of momentum =\(\frac{d p}{d t}=u \frac{d m}{d t}+m \frac{d v}{d t}=u \frac{d m}{d t}+m a\)

where, a = \(\frac{dv}{dt}\) = acceleration of the rocket.

As no external force is acting on the rocket, we have 0 = \(u \frac{d m}{d t}+m a, \quad \text { or, } a=-\frac{u}{m} \frac{d m}{d t}\)…(1)

The negative sign shows that the rocket is accelerated in a direction opposite to that of u. Therefore, the rocket increases its speed in the forward direction as a result of the backward exhaust of the burnt fuel.

A jet plane cannot fly where there is no air, because oxygen from air is used for combustion. Otherwise, its motion follows the same working principle as that of a rocket.

Newton Law Of Motion – Rocket And Jet Plane Numerical Examples

Example 1. A wagon is moving along a straight railway track with a velocity of 3.2 m · s-1. The wagon is being loaded with coal in moving condition at a rate of 540 kg · min-1. How much force is to be applied to move the wagon at a constant velocity? Mention the direction of force. Assume, the initial velocity of the coal in the horizontal direction is zero.
Solution:

Given

A wagon is moving along a straight railway track with a velocity of 3.2 m · s-1. The wagon is being loaded with coal in moving condition at a rate of 540 kg · min-1.

The velocity of the wagon, v = 3.2 m · s-1,

and the rate of change of mass of the wagon, \(\frac{d m}{d t}=540 \mathrm{~kg} \cdot \mathrm{min}^{-1}=\frac{540}{60} \mathrm{~kg} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}=9 \mathrm{~kg} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

Hence, force to be applied on the wagon to maintain its constant velocity (acceleration, a = \(\frac{dv}{dt}\) = 0),

F = \(v \frac{d m}{d t}+m \frac{d v}{d t}=3.2 \times 9+0=28.8 \mathrm{~N}\)

In this case, the direction of applied force and the direction of velocity of the wagon is identical.

Example 2. A rocket loses 1/40th of its mass in one second, during its upward motion. The speed of ejection of gas is 4000 m · s-1. Find the acceleration gained.
Solution:

Given

A rocket loses 1/40th of its mass in one second, during its upward motion. The speed of ejection of gas is 4000 m · s-1.

In this case, \(\frac{dm}{m}\) = \(\frac{1}{40}\), dt = 1s,

u = – 4000 m ·  s-1 (since u is in a downward direction)

Hence, acceleration, a = \(-\frac{u}{m} \frac{d m}{d t}=-\frac{u}{d t} \frac{d m}{m} \)

= \(4000 \times \frac{1}{40}=100 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-2} .\)

The positive value shows that the acceleration is upwards.

Example 3. A rocket is using 200 kg of fuel per second for its flight. Gas produced during combustion is ejected at a velocity of 6000 m • s-1. What is the force acting on the rocket?
Solution:

Given

A rocket is using 200 kg of fuel per second for its flight. Gas produced during combustion is ejected at a velocity of 6000 m • s-1.

Force acting on the rocket, F = \(\frac{dm}{dt}\)u.

Given, rate of combustion of fuel, \(\frac{dm}{dt}\) = 200 kg · s-1, the velocity of ejection of gas, u = 6000 m · s-1.

∴ F = -200 x 6000 kg · m- s-2 = -1.2 x 106 N

The negative sign indicates that the force acts in the direction opposite to that of the ejected gas.

Example 4. A machine gun fires bullets at the rate of 180 shots per minute. Each bullet is of mass 20 g and moves with a velocity of 1 km · s-1. After colliding perpendicularly with a steel plate, the bullets rebound at half the incident speed. What will be the force required to keep the steel plate in position?
Solution:

Given

A machine gun fires bullets at the rate of 180 shots per minute. Each bullet is of mass 20 g and moves with a velocity of 1 km · s-1. After colliding perpendicularly with a steel plate, the bullets rebound at half the incident speed.

Velocity of each bullet before impact = 1 km · s-1 = 1000 m · s-1

Velocity of each bullet after impact

= -1/2 km · s-1 = -1/2 x 1000 m · s-1 = -500 m · s-1

The negative sign indicates this velocity is oppositely directed.

∴ Change in velocity of each bullet after impact = 1000 – (-500) = 1500 m · s-1

Number of bullets incident per second on the steel plate = \(\frac{180}{60}\) = 3

∴ Rate of change of momentum of the three bullets = 3 x \(\frac{2}{1000}\) x 1500 = 90 N = force exerted on the steel plate.

Hence, the force required to hold the steel plate in position = 90 N.

Example 5. Just before take-off, the mass of a rocket is 4000 kg and the velocity of ejection of the burnt fuel is 400 m · s-1. What should be the rate of combustion of the fuel so that the rocket can take off vertically?
Solution:

Given

Just before take-off, the mass of a rocket is 4000 kg and the velocity of ejection of the burnt fuel is 400 m · s-1.

Let the mass of gas ejected per second be m.

∴ Change of momentum of the ejected gas per second = mv = 400m N.

∴ Force on the ejected gas =400mN = upward vertical reaction on the rocket.

Weight of the rocket = 4000 x 9.8 N.

For taking off, the vertical reaction force on the rocket must be slightly greater than the weight of the rocket.

As the limiting case, the vertical reaction force = weight of the rocket.

∴ 400m = 4000 x 9.8 or, m = 98 kg · s-1.

Newton Law Of Motion Synopsis

Newton’s First Law: Everybody continues to be in its state of rest or of uniform motion in a straight line unless the body is compelled to change its state by a net external force.

Newton’s Second Law: The rate of change of momen¬tum of a body is proportional to the impressed force and takes place in the direction in which the force acts.

Newton’s Third Law: To every action, there is an equal and opposite reaction.

  • Property by the virtue of which a body tries to retain its state of rest or of uniform motion is called inertia of the body. There are two types of inertia—inertia of rest and inertia of motion.
  • The tendency of a stationary body to remain at rest forever is called its inertia of rest.
  • The tendency of a moving body to maintain its motion in a straight line at a constant velocity is called its inertia of motion.

The external influence that changes or tends to change the state of rest or state of uniform motion of a body is called force. Force is a vector quantity.

  • The dynamic property arising from the combined effect of mass and velocity of a moving body is called its momentum.
  • A frame of reference, at rest or in uniform motion, is called an inertial frame of reference.
  • All three of Newton’s laws of motion are applicable in an inertial frame of reference.

An accelerating frame of reference is called a non-inertial frame of reference. None of Newton’s laws of motion holds good in a non-inertial frame of reference.

  • Mass of a body determines its inertia. Hence this mass is called inertial mass.
  • For a force acting on a body for an interval of time, the product of this force and the time is called the impulse of that force.
  • If a large force acts on a body for a very short interval of time, it is called an impulsive force.
  • Law of conservation of linear momentum: In the absence of any external force acting on a system of bodies—even if action-reaction forces exist among them, the total linear momentum of the system remains conserved.
  • A rocket’s or a jet plane’s motion is based on the law of conservation of linear momentum.

The oxidant (oxygen) required for the combustion of rocket fuel is carried in the rocket itself so the rocket can travel in outer space where there is no air. A jet plane requires atmospheric oxygen to bum its fuel. Therefore, a jet plane cannot fly in space.

Newton Law Of Motion Useful Relations For Solving Numerical Problems

Newton’s Third Law with Real-Life Examples

Momentum, p = mv

Applied force, F = \(m a=m\left(\frac{v-u}{t}\right)=\frac{m v-m u}{t}\)

Impulse of a force, Ft = mv- mu.

If the reaction force or normal force of a moving lift is R, its value when the lift

Ascends with an acceleration a is, R = m(g+ a)

Descends with an acceleration a is, R = m(g- a)

Ascends with a retardation a is, R = m(g- a)

Descends with a retardation a is, R = m(g+ a)

When the lift is at rest or ascending or descending with uniform velocity, R – mg

During free fall R = 0.

Law of conservation of linear momentum between two bodies: m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1+ m2v2

The form of Newton’s second law of motion for time-varying mass, \(F+u_{\mathrm{rel}} \frac{d m}{d t}=m a\)

 

Newton Law Of Motion Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. As per Newton’s laws of motion, only an external force can change the inertia of a body. When a car is brought to rest by the application of brakes, which external force stops the car?
Answer: Frictional force applied by road

Question 2. A man, in a train in uniform motion, throws a ball vertically upwards. Will the ball return to his hand?
Answer: Yes

Question 3. From the roof of a train, a metal ball is suspended by a string. When the train moves with uniform velocity, will the string remain vertical?
Answer: Yes

Question 4. A body in motion is acted upon by a force. Will the body stop at the moment of withdrawal of the force?
Answer: No

Question 5. A force of 200 dyn acts on a mass of 10 g for 5 s. Initially the body was at rest. What will be the final velocity of the mass?
Answer: 100cm · s-1

Question 6. A man is coming down a hanging rope. The rope can bear up to 2/3 of his weight. The minimum acceleration with which the man can come down is _________
Answer: g/ 3

Question 7. Write the name of the physical quantity whose unit is the same as that of the impulse of a force.
Answer: Momentum

Question 8. A body of weight W1 is suspended from the ceiling of a room by a rope of weight W2. What is the force exerted by the ceiling on the rope?
Answer: W1 + W2

Question 9. Arrangements of two identical pulleys are shown in Fig. 1.49. The strings have negligible masses. In (1) mass m is pulled up by attaching a mass 2 m at the other end of the string and (2) mass m is pulled up by applying a downward force of 2 mg at the other end of the string. What are the accelerations in the two cases?

Newtons Law Of Motion Arrangement Of Two Identical Pulleys

Answer: g/3,g

Question 10. A spring balance is set in a stationary lift. A person of mass 50 kg is standing on that balance. What will be the change in the reading of the balance if the lift moves upwards with constant velocity?
Answer: No change

Question 11. A spring balance is set in a stationary lift. A person of mass 50 kg is standing on the balance. What will be the change in the balance reading when the lift moves upwards with a constant acceleration?
Answer: An increase

Question 12. A man of mass 50 kg is descending at a constant velocity using a parachute. What is the air resistance on the man?
Answer: 490 N

Question 13. Two bodies of equal masses are kept on the scale pans of a beam balance in a lift. If the lift starts moving up with an acceleration, will the beam balance be in equilibrium?
Answer: Yes

Question 14. Can a rocket operate in free space?
Answer: Yes

Question 15. What is the principle of Rocket propulsion?
Answer: Conservation of linear momentum

Question 16. A bomb explodes in mid-air into two equal fragments. What is the direction of motion of the two fragments?
Answer: Opposite to each other

Newton Law Of Motion Assertion Reason Type Question And Answers

Direction: These questions have statement 1 and statement 2. Of the four choices given below, choose the one that best describes the two statements.

  1. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true; statement 2 is a correct explanation for statement 1.
  2. Statement 1 is true, and statement 2 is true; statement 2 is not a correct explanation for statement 1.
  3. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is false.
  4. Statement 1 is false, and statement 2 is true.

Question 1.

Statement 1: A cloth covers a table. Some dishes are kept on it. The cloth can be pulled out without dislodg¬ing the dishes from the table.

Statement 2: For every action, there is an equal and opposite reaction.

Answer: 2. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true; statement 2 is not a correct explanation for statement 1.

Question 2.

Statement 1: A reference frame attached to the earth is an inertial frame of reference.

Statement 2: The reference frame which has zero acceleration is called an inertial frame of reference.

Answer: 4. Statement 1 is false, statement 2 is true.

Question 3.

Statement 1: A concept of pseudo forces is valid both for inertial as well as non-inertial frames of reference.

Statement 2: A frame accelerated with respect to an inertial frame is a non-inertial frame.

Answer: 4. Statement 1 is false, statement 2 is true.

Question 4.

Statement 1: Block A is moving on a horizontal surface towards right under the action of force F. All surfaces are smooth. At the instant shown, the force exerted by block A on block B is equal to the net force on block B.

Newtons Law Of Motion Block A Is Moving Horizontal Surface

Statement 2: From Newton’s third law of motion, the force exerted by block A on B is equal in magnitude to the force exerted by block B on A.

Answer: 4. Statement 1 is false, statement 2 is true.

Question 5.

Statement 1: During free fall of a person one feels weightlessness because his weight becomes zero.

Statement 2: He falls with an acceleration of g.

Answer: 1. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true; statement 2 is a correct explanation for statement 1.

Question 6.

Statement 1: When a person walks on a rough surface, the net force exerted by the surface on the person in the direction of his motion.

Statement 2: It is the force exerted by the road on the person that causes the motion.

Answer: 4. Statement 1 is false, statement 2 is true.

Newton Law Of Motion Match Column 1 With Column 2

Question 1. A block of mass m is released from rest when the spring was in its natural length. The pulley also has mass m but it is frictionless. Suppose the value of m is such that finally it is able to just lift the block M.

Newtons Law Of Motion A Block Of Mass m is Released From rest

Newtons Law Of Motion Match The Column Question 1

Answer: 1. C, 2. C,3. C, 4. B, D

Question 2. In the diagram shown, match the following column, (g = 10 m/s²)

Newtons Law Of Motion

Newtons Law Of Motion Match The Column Question 2

Answer: 1. B, 2. D, 3. A, 4. D

Newton Law Of Motion Comprehension Type Question And Answers

Read the following passages carefully and answer the questions at the end of them.

Question 1. A ball of mass 200 g is thrown with a speed 20 m · s-1. The ball strikes a bat and rebounds along the same line at a speed of 40 m · s-1. Variation in the interaction force, as long as the ball remains in contact with the bat, is shown.

Newtons Law Of Motion A Ball Of Mass 200g Is Thrown

1. Maximum force F0 exerted by the bat on the ball is

  1. 4000 N
  2. 5000 N
  3. 3000 N
  4. 2500 N

Answer: 1. 4000 N

2. Average force exerted by the bat on the ball is

  1. 5000 N
  2. 2000 N
  3. 2500 N
  4. 6000 N

Answer: 2. 2000 N

3. What is the speed of the ball at the instant the force acting on it is maximum?

  1. 40 m · s-1
  2. 30 m · s-1
  3. 20 m · s-1
  4. 10 m · s-1

Answer: 3. 20 m · s-1

Question 2. Three blocks m1 = 10 kg, m2 = 20 kg, and m3 = 30 kg are on a smooth horizontal table, connected to the adjacent blocks by light horizontal strings. A horizontal force F = 60 N is applied to m3, towards the right.

Newtons Law Of Motion Three Blocks Are On Smooth Horizontal tables

1. The tension (T1) acting between m1 and m2 is

  1. 10N
  2. 15N
  3. 20N
  4. 25N

Answer: 1. 10N

2. Tension (T2) acting between m2 and m3 is

  1. 25N
  2. 30N
  3. 24N
  4. 15N

Answer: 2. 30N

3. The tension (T2), if all of a sudden the string between m1 and m2 snaps, is

  1. 30N
  2. 24N
  3. 25N
  4. 15N

Answer: 2. 24N

Question 3. A stone of mass 0.05 kg is thrown in vertically by upward direction (take g = 10 m · s-2). Neglect air friction,

1. The net force acting on the stone during its upward motion is

  1. 0.5 N, upward
  2. 0.5 N, downward
  3. 5 N, upward
  4. Zero

Answer: 2. 0.5 N, downward

2. The net force acting on the stone during its downward motion is

  1. 0.5 N, upward
  2. 0.5 N, downward
  3. 5 N, upward
  4. Zero

Answer: 2. 0.5 N, downward

Newton Law Of Motion Integer Answer Type Questions

In this type, the answer to each of the questions is a single-digit integer ranging from 0 to 9.

Question 1. On planet X, a man throws a 500 g mass with a speed of 20 m · s-1 and catches it as it comes down 20 seconds later. Find the weight of the mass (in N units).
Answer: 1

Question 2. The elevator shows it is descending with an acceleration of 2 m · s-1. The mass of the block A = 0.5 kg. What should be the force (in N) exerted by the block A on the block B? Given g = 10 m • s-2.

Newtons Law Of Motion Elavator

Answer: 4

Question 3. A monkey of mass 30 kg climbs a rope that can withstand a maximum tension of 360 N. Find the maximum acceleration (in m · s-2) of the climbing monkey which this rope can tolerate, (g = 10m · s-2)
Answer: 2

Question 4. In the arrangement shown the mass M is very heavy compared to m (M»m). The tension in the string is nmg. Find the value of n.

Newtons Law Of Motion Two Masses m And 2m Are Connected Pulley

Answer: 4

Question 5. Find the acceleration of three blocks (in m • s-2) as shown. Each surface of the system is smooth.

Newtons Law Of Motion Acceleration Of Three Blocks

Answer: 3

 

WBCHSE Class 11 Physics Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity Notes

Physical World And Measurement

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity

Scoped And Excitements Of Physics

WBBSE Class 11 Measurement and Dimension Notes

The conquest of physics is often compared to is climbing up a mountain. We climb up to get a better view and a better realization of the universe around us. The farther we climb, the greater is our view and we acquire a more refined knowledge.

  • Sometimes the old path is abandoned, temporarily or permanently, and a new path is invented to climb up to a higher level and to have a better view of the realities of nature.
  • A generally accepted viewpoint is that the peak of the mountain is far above the highest point we could reach so far.
  • The peak, the ultimate truth regarding nature, is probably far beyond our present-day conceptions.
  • As a consequence. the scopes of physics, and of science in general, and the corresponding excitements are almost limitless, paving the way for continuous quests for the truths of the universe.

Read and Learn More: Class 11 Physics Notes

 Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity

Nature Of Physical Laws

Physics is concerned with the study of matter and energy in transit. The theoretical structure of physics in the present times is as follows:

Classical Physics: Before the beginning of the 20th century, it was convincingly established that,

  1. Matter is composed of particles and obeys Newton’s laws of motion, and
  2. Radiant energy is composed of waves and obeys Max-well’s electromagnetic field theory.

These two constitute what is known today as classical physics. This has been extremely successful to date, except in the domains of

  1. Particle speed compared to that of light (3 x 10-8 m · s-1) and
  2. Particle size of the order of 10-10m or less.

Theory Of Relativity: When the particle speed rises to nearly the speed of light, Newton’s laws are no longer obeyed. Einstein’s theory of relativity can successfully explain particle behaviors in that domain. However, this theory is not just a modification of the classical one: it introduces some revolutionary concepts, particularly on space and time.

Quantum Mechanics: Classical physics fails to describe the motion of microscopic particles, of diameter 10-10 m or less. Heisenberg, Schrodinger, de Broglie, Dirac, and others developed quantum mechanics, that can successfully describe this domain. In contradiction to the classical concept, it establishes the dual nature of both matter and radiation: each of them behaves sometimes as the composition of particles, and at other times, of waves.

Quantum Field Theory: This encompasses the theories of relativity and quantum mechanics, and hence, describes the behaviors of high-speed microscopic particles.

WBCHSE Class 11 Physics Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity Notes

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity

Conservation Principles

A few inherent symmetries of nature led the physicists to accept some conservation principles and to analyze the physical world on the basis of these principles. A physical quantity is said to be conserved when it can change its manifestation only, but can never be created or destroyed. The most important of these principles are:

  1. Conservation Of Mass-Energy: The symmetry of nature with respect to translation of time is called homogeneity of time and it leads to the law of conservation of energy.
    • Earlier, the conservation of mass and the conservation of energy constituted two separate principles. The theory of relativity established that mass and energy are interconvertible, and this concept led to the principle of conservation of mass-energy.
  2. Conservation Of Linear Momentum: Laws of nature take the same form everywhere in the universe i.e., there is no preferred location in the universe. This symmetry of the laws of nature with respect to displacement or translation in space is called homogeneity of space and gives rise to the law of conservation of linear momentum.
  3. Conservation Of Angular Momentum: Isotropy of space (i.e., there is no preferred direction in space) gives rise to conservation of angular momentum.
  4. Conservation Of Charge: Charged particles can be created but only in pairs of equal and opposite charge such that the total amount of charge remains the same.

A few other conservation principles are also in use.

Four Basic Interactions: Only four types of interactions among matter and energy exist in nature and each of them is mediated by the exchange of a particle called mediator or exchange particle.

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity Name Of Fundamnetal Forces

Key Concepts in Measurement for Class 11

  1. Gravitational Interaction: This is the attractive interaction between two masses. It obeys the inverse square law. So its range is infinite theoretically, although it may not be detectable beyond a large but finite distance. It is the weakest force in nature.
  2. Electromagnetic Interaction: This is the attractive or repulsive interaction between two electrostatic charges, or between two magnetic poles. The range is similar to that of gravitational interaction.
  3. Strong Or Nuclear Interaction: It is the strong attractive force that is responsible for holding neutrons and protons together inside the atomic nucleus. It is a noncentral and nonconservative force. It is a short-range force that operates only over the size of the nucleus (~10-14 m). Beyond this, the interaction goes to zero. It does not obey the inverse square law.
  4. Weak Interaction: An example of this interaction is that of an electron with a proton or a neutron within nuclear dimensions as in a beta decay. Its range is also very short—it ceases beyond about 10-15 m.

The following table gives a summary of the four fundamental forces in order of increasing strength.

Einstein conceived a dream that all four interactions are different manifestations of a single ultimate natural interaction. This came from his strong belief that nature has some form of ultimate overall symmetry.

The consequent but so far undiscovered concept is known to physicists as the unified field theory. The quest for this theory is on. In spite of some partial successes, the gravitational interaction in particular escaped to show any substantial link with the other three interactions.

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity

Physics And Technology

Technology is known to be the bridge between the concepts of science and their application to human needs. The rattling of the lid of a kettle containing boiling water led to the concept of the power of steam. Consequently, steam engines were constructed by technologists to utilize steam power directly for human needs. There are many similar examples.

  • The theory of the action of magnets on currents led to electric fans and motors, electromagnetic induction has been utilized to construct electricity-producing dynamos in large power plants, the study of radioactivity-produced nuclear bombs and nuclear power plants, and so on.
  • In the modern applications of electronics, telecommunications, computers, and the internet, physics, and technology march almost simultaneously.
  • In these fields, there are almost no partition lines physicists and technologists almost always complement each other.

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity

Physics And Society

Physics has always provided very valuable contributions toward the necessities, amenities, and luxuries of our society. Mem in this present society would not certainly have been able to live without the outcomes of physics like electricity, telecommunication, computers, and the internet.

  • On the other hand, it must be noted that physics and its practices are nothing but parts of our society. As such, it enjoys the social virtues, and at this same time, cannot escape the social evils.
  • It is benefitted from the inherent human nature of pursuing knowledge, in the quest for novel developments.
  • On the other hand, it had to be instrumental in the production of nuclear bombs. Proper funding, skilled human resources, and other facilities for physics are often minimal in some countries.
  • It is obvious that the development of physics has always been and will always be closely interlinked with the development of our society as a whole.

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity

Matter And Energy

Dimensional Analysis Notes for Class 11 Physics

Air, water, clay, sand, and all such natural substances are made of matter. There are three types of matter

  1. Element,
  2. Compound and
  3. Mixture.

Hydrogen, oxygen, etc. are examples of elements. Whereas water, common salt, etc. are compounds and air, milk, etc. are mixtures. Matter manifests itself in the form of material bodies. A material body, simply called a body, has mass and occupies space.

In nature, every material body is observed to change its state frequently in some form or other. For example, a stone kept under direct sunlight becomes hot, naphthalene balls decrease in size with time, and the water level in a beaker decreases with time. During all such changes matter exchanges energy with its surroundings.

Energy is generally described as the ability to do work. Energy manifests itself in nature in one of the following forms:

  1. Mechanical energy,
  2. Heat energy,
  3. Light energy,
  4. Sound energy,
  5. Magnetic energy,
  6. Electrical energy,
  7. Chemical energy and
  8. Nuclear energy.

In classical physics, nature has two entities matter and energy. Both are indestructible. Matter can neither be created nor destroyed, it can only change from one form to another. Similar is the case with energy. These properties led to the formulation of

  1. The law of conservation of mass and
  2. The law of conservation of energy. Later, following Einstein’s theory of relativity, it was discovered that mass could be converted into energy (nuclear fission process) or energy into mass (production of electron-positron pair from a moving photon). This led to a single conservation law the law of conservation of mass energy.

 

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity

Length Mass And Time Measurement

Measurement Of Length: Length measurement methods are of two types

  1. Direct method and
  2. Indirect method.

A physical quantity is measured by comparing it with a standard measurement which defines its unit. For example, when we measure some length, we measure with respect to some standard value like lm or 1cm.

Standard Length: Distance traveled by light in 1/299792458 second in vacuum, is taken as 1 meter.

Direct Method: In this method, the length to be measured is directly compared with the standard unit of length. A scale or ruler can be used to measure the length, breadth, and height of a book. Such scales are already graduated as per the unit of length, and its fractions and multiples. Vernier scale, screw gauge, etc. are also used to measure 2 lengths and other equivalent quantities like diameter, depth, etc.

Indirect Method: Very long lengths like the distance of a star from the earth or very short lengths like the diameter of a molecule, cannot be measured by direct methods. In such cases indirect methods like triangulation method, reflection or echo method, parallax method, etc. are used.

Physical quantities like length, height, distance, radius, and depth have the same dimension and the units for their measurement are also the same, like cm, m, km, in., ft, mi, etc. However, their measured values differ widely in magnitudes. Hence different measuring instruments and techniques are required. The measuring instruments also differ depending on the shape of the body.

Ordinary Scale Or Ruler: It is a thin rectangular metal or wooden strip calibrated in centimeter scale along its length. The smallest scale division is usually 1 mm or 0.1 cm. Its extreme left end is marked 0 cm.

  • However, the marking on the extreme right end reads 15 cm, 30 cm, 50 cm, or 100 cm according to the length of the scale. When the marking of scale is from 0 cm to 100 cm it is called a metre-scale.
  • Ruler of this type is mainly used for measuring the length of a straight line, a straight rod, stretched wires, etc. The length of a line can be measured by putting the 0 mark on the scale at one end and taking the reading on the ruler at the other end.

Eye Estimation: If the length of a line is 3 cm or 7 cm exactly, the measurement should be written as 3.0 cm or 7.0 cm. It is often seen that although the start of the line coincides with the 0 mark, the end does not coincide with any mark on the scale. It lies between two successive marks.

In a measurement, let the extreme right end lie between 7.6 and 7.7 cm. If the end appears to be exactly in the middle of the two marks the length can be estimated as 7.65 cm although the extreme right digit is not reliable. Based on eye estimation only, the reading should not be written as 7.63 cm, 7.66 cm, etc.

Vernier Scale: In a ruler or a scale the smallest scale division is usually 1 mm or, sometimes, 0.54 mm. Hence such scales cannot be used to measure accurately any length less than the limits stated. In 1631, Pierre Vernier, a French mathematician, invented the ‘vernier scale’ that can increase the accuracy of measurement.

Vernier Scale Description: M, the main scale, is an ordinary scale graduated in cm. Usually, the smallest scale division is 1 mm i. e., 0.1 cm. V is a small scale, called the vernier scale, attached to the main scale and can slide along the edge of it. A typical vernier scale is shown where 10 divisions of this scale equal 9 divisions of the main scale.

Method Of Measurement With A Vernier Scale: The smallest length that a vernier scale can measure is equal to the difference in lengths between the 1 smallest main scale division and the 1 smallest vernier scale division. The value of this difference is called the vernier constant.

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity Verinary Constant

Calculation Of The Vernier Constant:

  1. The value of l smallest main scale division (say, m unit) is noted.
  2. The 0 marks on the vernier and the main scale are set to coincide.

Starting from zero, the mark on the main scale that coincides with the last mark on the vernier scale is counted.

Now, let y divisions of the vernier scale coincide with x divisions on the main scale.

Hence, the length of y divisions of the vernier scale = the length of x divisions of the main scale.

∴ Length of 1 division of vernier scale = length of \(\frac{x}{y}\) divisions of main scale = \(\frac{x}{y}\) x m unit

Therefore, vernier constant, c = length of 1 main scale division – length of 1 vernier scale division

∴ c = \(m-\frac{x}{y} \times m=m\left(1-\frac{x}{y}\right)=m\left(\frac{y-x}{y}\right) \text { unit }\)

For most of the vernier scales, (y-x) = 1

Hence, vernier constant c = \(\frac{m}{y}\)

m = 1 mm = 0.1 cm and y = 10, c = \(\frac{0.1}{10}\) cm or 0.01 cm or 0.1 mm.

Hence, the instrument can be measured with an accuracy of 0. 1 mm.

Fundamental and Derived Units Explained

Measurement Using A Vernier Scale: To measure the length of a rod R, the left end of R is set to coincide with the 0 mark of the main scale. Now, the vernier scale is set in such a way that its 0 mark touches the right end of R.

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity Vernier Scale

At this stage, the main scale reading that is just on the left of the vernier 0 mark is noted. This reading is denoted as a. a = 2.6. Next, the reading on the vernier that coincides best with any one marking on the main scale is noted.

Let this reading of the vernier be b. b = 5 since the fifth vernier division coincides with a marking of the main scale.

So, the length l of the rod R is given by, l = main scale reading + vernier scale reading x vernier constant

or, l = a+ b x c =(2.6 + 5 x 0.01)cm =2.65 cm.

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity

Length Mass And Time Measurement Numerical Examples

Example 1. Find the length of the rod.

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity Length Of The Rod

Solution:

The value of 1 smallest main scale division is \(\frac{1}{10}\) = 0.1 cm.

10 vernier divisions coincide with 9 main scale divisions (MSD)

∴ Vernier constant, c = (1 – \(\frac{9}{10}\))x 0.1 cm = 0.01 cm.

0 of the vernier scale crossed 2.2 cm mark on the main scale and 5th vernier division coincides with one main scale division.

∴ The length of the rod = (2.2 + 5 x 0.01) cm = 2.25 cm.

Example 2. Estimate the length of the rod R.

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity Length Of The Rod 1

Solution:

The value of 1 smallest main scale division is \(\frac{1}{10}\) = 0.1 cm.

5 vernier divisions coincide with 4 main scale divisions.

∴ Vernier constant, c = (1 –\(\frac{4}{5}\)) x 0.1 = 0.02 cm.

Class 11 Physics Class 12 Maths Class 11 Chemistry
NEET Foundation Class 12 Physics NEET Physics

0 of the vernier scale crossed the 3.7 cm mark on the main scale and the 3rd vernier scale mark coincides with an MSD.

∴ Length = (3.7 + 3 x 0.02) = 3.76 cm.

Screw Gauge: A screw gauge can measure lengths smaller than those measured with a vernier. Normally screw gauges can measure lengths up to 0.01 mm, i.e., 10 micrometers (μm), and as such are known as micrometer screw gangs.

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity Screw Gauge

The working principle is—when a screw is turned, it travels uniformly in a direction perpendicular to the plane of rotation. On one complete rotation, the screw travels a distance equal to its pitch, i.e., the distance between two consecutive threads on the screw.

Screw Gauge Description: A screw gauge essentially consists of a thick U-shaped metal frame with a flat end on its left arm A, called a stud. Its right arm ends in a long, hollow, cylindrical nut C whose inner side is threaded.

  • A screw S, having one flat end B, can be moved inside the nut C by rotating a hollow cylinder D, called a thimble, attached at the other end of the screw. The main scale (L) usually graduated in mm is marked on a baseline on the surface of C.
  • The thimble is also graduated and usually is divided into 100 or 50 divisions. It is called the circular scale (R). A rachet E is attached to the screw, by a spring.
  • When the flat end B of the screw is in contact with the stud A, any further movement of the rachet does not press B against A. The rachet, therefore, helps to hold the object to be measured gently, without any deformation, between A and B.

Screw Gauge Description Example: In an experiment if c = 0.001 cm, the main scale reading is 0.7 cm and the circular scale reading is 37, then d = 0.7 cm + 37 x 0.001 cm = 0.737 cm.

Pitch And Loast Count Of A Screw Gauge: The distance advanced by the thimble along the baseline (L) on one complete rotation of the circular scale, is called pitch or screw pitch. To determine the pitch, the 0 mark on the circular scale is aligned with the baseline, and the reading on the main scale is recorded.

  • The thimble or circular scale is rotated once to coincide the 0 mark of the circular scale with the baseline again and then the new reading is taken. The difference between the two readings along the main scale is tire pitch.
  • Usually, the pitch equals the value of the smallest main scale division, 0.5 mm or 1 mm. The ratio between the pitch and the number of divisions on the circular scale is the least count (c).

Thus, least count, c = \(\frac{\text { pitch }}{\text { no. of divisions on the circular scale }}\)

Least count of a screw gauge is the smallest length that can be measured with it.

For example, if the screw pitch is 0.1 cm, i.e., 1 nr and the circular scale has 100 divisions, then, c = \(\frac{0.1}{100}\) = 0.001 cm

Method Of Measurement: The object whose thickness is to be measured, like a thin wire or a thin metal sheet, is placed between the stud A and the flat end B of the screw such that the two surfaces of the object touch A and B. In this situation both the readings on

  1. The main scale and
  2. The circular scale are noted. Then, the thickness of the object (d) = reading on the main scale + reading on the circular scale x c.

Method Of Measurement Example: If c = 0.001 cm (say), the main scale reading is 0.7 cm and the circular scale reading is 37.

∴ d = 0.7 cm + 37 x 0.001 cm = 0.737 cm

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity

Screw Gauge Numerical Examples

Dimensional Formula of Physical Quantities Notes

Example 1. Find the screw pitch of a screw gauge having 100 circular scale divisions and a least count of 0.002 cm.
Solution:

A screw gauge having 100 circular scale divisions and a least count of 0.002 cm

Screw pitch

= least count x number of divisions on a circular scale

= 0.002 cm x 100 = 0.2 cm

Example 2. A screw gauge has 50 circular scale divisions and a pitch of 0.1 cm. When this is used to measure the thickness of a plate, the main scale reading is 0.2 cm and the circular scale reading is 35. What is the thickness of the plate?
Solution:

Given

A screw gauge has 50 circular scale divisions and a pitch of 0.1 cm. When this is used to measure the thickness of a plate, the main scale reading is 0.2 cm and the circular scale reading is 35.

Least count (c) for the screw gauge = \(\frac{0.1}{50}\) = 0.002 cm

So the thickness of the plate, t = 0.2 cm + 35 x 0.002 cm = 0.27 cm

Measurement Of Mass: The principle of moments is applied to measure the unknown mass of a body by comparing it with a standard mass using a beam balance or common balance.

Standard Mass: The mass of a platinum-iridium cylinder kept at the International Bureau of Weights and Measures near Paris is taken as the standard mass and is 1 kilogram.

Spring balance and weighing machines can be used to find the weight of a body: the mass can be calculated from these measurements also.

Some indirect methods are employed for the measurement of the mass of practically inaccessible bodies like planets and atomic particles:

  1. Measurement of the gravitational pull of a planet on a known mass;
  2. Mass spectroscopy, when an atomic particle is charged.

Measurement Of Time: The concept of time measurement is always based on some periodic event in nature. An event is periodic if it repeats itself over and over again consuming the same amount of time.

Measurement Of Time Example:

  1. The earth completes a full rotation about its axis in a day. This event repeats itself over and over again and is, thus, periodic. So the time period of the earth’s diurnal motion is a day. This period—a day—can be used as a unit in this measurement of time. For convenience, a day is subdivided to get other units like an hour, a minute, and a second.
  2. The earth completes a full revolution around the sun in a year. So the time period of the earth’s annual motion is a year. This period—a year—can also be taken as a unit of time. It can be subdivided to get units like a month and a day; or can be multiplied to get longer units like a decade, a century, or a millennium.

The instrument for the measurement of time is a clock. Clocks of different forms are used for time measurements of different types. A clock should always be calibrated initially in any of the time units discussed above.

  • However, a day or a year has noticeable uncertainties in its value and cannot provide a reliable and accurate measure of the units used in clocks. For example, a second, defined from a day or from a year, is highly uncertain and not at all reliable.
  • At present, universally accepted high-precision time measurement techniques are provided by atomic clocks. This is not actually a clock of practical use; rather the frequencies of electromagnetic radiations emitted by atoms are utilized for a high-precision definition of the standard unit of time—one second.
  • The cesium clock is the particular atomic clock used in SI to define a second. Since the cesium-133 atom emits electromagnetic radiation of a precise and constant frequency, it was chosen as the atomic clock standard. This definition is given below:

Definition Of 1 Second: Standard time, 1 second in SI, is defined as 9192631770 periods of radiation from cesium- 133 atoms, at a fixed wavelength. The clock has a least count of about 10-10 s and has a precision of 1 s in 1 x 1018 s.

Clocks In Day-To-Day Use: The cesium clock is the primary clock that defines the unit of time—a second. But actual day-to-day use employs secondary clocks, which are calibrated as per the predefined second, and the time to be measured is directly obtained from the calibrations.

  1. A pendulum has a definite period of oscillation. This is used in pendulum clocks.
  2. A periodically vibrating coiled spring is utilised in wind-ing-type wristwatches.
  3. A quartz crystal oscillator vibrates at a natural frequency of 32768 Hz, i.e., the period of vibration is 1/32768 second. This is the source of modem high-precision quartz clocks.

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity

Errors In Measurement

Measurement of a physical quantity cannot be free from errors. Errors in measurements are usually of two types

Systematic Error: Generally two types of systematic errors are known:

  1. Instrumental Error: This arises due to defective instruments.
  2. Personal Error: This arises from incorrect setting of the instruments, and incorrect recording of data.
    • Systematic errors can be minimized or eliminated by properly identifying the sources of errors.

Random Error: This type of error arises randomly due to known and unknown reasons that are entirely beyond our control. Random errors cannot be eliminated totally.

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity

Calculation Of Errors

Even when a particular physical quantity is measured many times under identical conditions using the same method, the results may not be identical. This dispersion arises due to errors and cannot be eliminated totally.

Actual Or True Value: Let the values of measurement of a physical quantity, measured n times using the same instrument and the same method be x1,x2, x3,….xn. The average of the measurements is then considered to be the actual or true value of the physical quantity.

Hence, actual value, \(\bar{x}=\frac{x_1+x_2+x_3+\cdots+x_n}{n}\)

Error: It is not sufficient to write the actual value x as the absolute value in a measurement. The extent of uncertainty associated with \(\bar {x}\) needs to be mentioned.

Hence, absolute value is x = \(\bar{x} \pm \epsilon\); where ∈, the uncertainty, can be calculated as

∴ \(\epsilon=\frac{\left|x_1-\bar{x}\right|+\left|x_2-\bar{x}\right|+\cdots+\left|x_n-\bar{x}\right|}{n}\)

i. e., ∈ is the average of the differences between the measured value and the actual value, ∈ is also referred to as the mean absolute error. It is to be noted, \(\left|x_1-\bar{x}\right|,\left|x_2-\bar{x}\right|, \cdots\left|x_n-\bar{x}\right| geqslant 0\)

Fractional Error Or Relative Error: it is the ratio of the mean absolute error to the absolute value, i.e., \(\frac{\epsilon}{x}.\).

Percentage Error: It is obtained by multiplying the fractional error by 100. Hence, percentage error = \(\frac{\epsilon}{x} .\) x 100.

Propagation Of Errors: When the value of a physical quantity involves a number of measurements, the resultant error depends on

  1. The error associated with each individual measurement, and
  2. Mathematical operations (addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, etc.) are required to arrive at the final value.

Here, we shall discuss the second factor. It is said that the errors in measurement propagate with the said mathematical operations.

Let, Δa, Δb, Δc, …. be the mean absolute errors, respectively, in the measurements of a, b, c, ….. Then in the determination of x, due to mathematical operations among a, b, c, …., Δx = maximum absolute error, f = \(\frac{\Delta x}{x}\) = maximum fractional error and p = \(\frac{\Delta x}{x}\) x 100 = maximum percentage error.

Measurement Techniques in Physics: Class 11 Notes

1. Error Due To Addition: If x = a+ b+ c+ …., then, \(\Delta x=\Delta a+\Delta b+\Delta c+\cdots\)

f = \(\frac{\Delta a+\Delta b+\Delta c+\cdots}{a+b+c+\cdots}\)

p = \(\frac{\Delta a+\Delta b+\Delta c+\cdots}{a+b+c+\cdots} \times 100\)

2. Error Due To Subtraction: If x = a = b, then, \(\Delta x=\Delta a+\Delta b ; f=\frac{\Delta x+\Delta b}{|a-b|} ; p=\frac{\Delta x+\Delta b}{|a-b|} \times 100\)

It is to be noted that, if a and b have very close values, then due to the low value of |a – b|, the error due to subtraction tends to become very high.

3. Error Due To Multiplication: If x = ab, then, f = \(\frac{\Delta a}{a}+\frac{\Delta b}{b} ; p=\left(\frac{\Delta a}{a}+\frac{\Delta b}{b}\right) \times 100\)

4. Error Due To Division: If x = \(\frac{a}{b}\), then, \(f=\frac{\Delta a}{a}+\frac{\Delta b}{b} ; p=\left(\frac{\Delta a}{a}+\frac{\Delta b}{b}\right) \times 100\)

5. Error Due To Powers Of a, b, c, …..: If x = \(\frac{a^k c^m}{b^l}=a^k b^{-l} c^m\), then

f = \(k \frac{\Delta a}{a}+l \frac{\Delta b}{b}+m \frac{\Delta c}{c} ;\)

p = \(\left(k \frac{\Delta a}{a}+l \frac{\Delta b}{b}+m \frac{\Delta c}{c}\right) \times 100\)

It is to be noted that the error is high for high values of k, l, m. For example, if m is high but k and l are comparatively low in the expression of x, then a considerable amount of error tends to arise from the measurement of c. So, c should be measured more precisely than a or b.

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity

Significant Figures

In a measurement, the digits in the measured value is said to be significant figures when all the digits except the last one are reliably accurate.

Significant Figures Example: Suppose you measure the length of a rod with the help of an ordinary scale (in such a scale the distance between two divisions is 0.1 cm). You observe that the length of the rod is more than 20.1 cm but less than 20.2 cm.

  • In general, if you look carefully, you will find that the length is either closer to 20.1 cm or 20.2 cm. If it is closer to 20.1 cm, you can write it as 20.1 cm. But you know that the last digit 1 is inaccurate, i.e., uncertain. Thus, the number of significant figures of this measurement is 3.
  • A number of significant figures in any reading or measure¬ment indicates how accurate the reading or measurement is. The following points need to be taken into consideration while determining the number of significant figures in a reading or measurement.
  1. All non-zero digits are significant.
  2. To count the number of significant figures or digits, we begin from the leftmost non-zero digit and count all the digits up to the rightmost digit; for example, 27.7 has 3 significant figures.
  3. Zeros between two non-zero digits are significant; for example, 207.007 has 6 significant figures.
  4. Zeros between the decimal point and the first non-zero digit to its right are not significant; for example, 0.00207 has 3 significant figures.
  5. Zeros on the right of the decimal point are significant if there is at least one non-zero digit to its left; for example, 277.0 has 4 significant digits.
    • Note that the number of significant figures of 277 and 277.0 are 3 and 4 respectively. The former denotes that only the last 7 is uncertain while the latter denotes that only 0 is uncertain.
  6. Zeros added to the right of a measured value, while changing the unit, are not significant; for example, when 277.0 kg is written as 277000 g, the number of significant digits remains the same, i.e., 4 only. Note that we should write a mass as either 2.770 x 10² kg or 2.770 x 105 g to avoid the error in counting significant figures.
  7. During the multiplication of two numbers or during the division of one number by another, the number of significant figures of the product or quotient respectively should be equal to that of the number with less significant figures.
    • For example, let an object of mass 10 g have a volume of 3 cm3. Hence its density is supposed to be 10 ÷ 3 = 3.33… g · cm-3. But since the number of significant figures of volume is 1, the quotient has to be written as 3 g · cm-3 i.e., with one significant figure.
    • Again if the volume of an object is 4.23 cm³ and density is 11 g · cm-3, the mass will be 4.23 x 11 = 46.53 g. But since the number of significant figures of density is 2, the product has to be written as 46 g i.e., with two significant figures only.
  8. During the addition of two numbers or subtraction of one number from another, the number of digits to the right of the decimal point in the sum or difference should be equal to that of the number with less number of digits to the right of the decimal point. In this case, it is immaterial how many significant figures the two numbers contain.
    • For example, if the length of two rods are 5 m and 1.25 m, then the actual sum of the lengths of the rods is 6.25 m. But since for 5 m (number of significant figures = 1), the number of digits to the right of the decimal point is 0, the sum is to be expressed as:
    • 5(number of significant figures = 1) + 1.25 (number of significant figures = 3) = 6 (number of significant figures = 1)

A few More Examples For determining the Number Of Significant Figures Are Given Below:

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity Number Of Significant Figures

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity

Rules For Rounding Off Digits

The accuracy of a result obtained by mathematical calculation can never be greater than the accuracy of original physical measurements. Therefore, the non-significant figures should be dropped from the result.

The following rules are adopted while dropping figures in rounding off to the appropriate digit:

  1. If the digit to be dropped is less than 5 then the preceding digit is kept unchanged. For example, if the number 3.454 is to be rounded off to three significant figures the digit to be dropped is 4 which is less than 5. Hence the preceding digit, namely 5, is not changed. Therefore, it should be written as 3.45.
  2. If the digit to be dropped is more than 5, then the preceding digit is increased by 1. For example, 3.458 is rounded off as 3.46 to three significant figures.
  3. If the digit to be dropped happens to be 5 or 5 followed by zero(s), then the preceding digit to be retained is increased by 1 if it is odd; if it is even then it remains unchanged.
    • For example, 3.475 3.4750 or 3.47500, when rounded off to the second decimal place, will be written as 3.48. For numbers like 3.48, 3.4850, or 3.48500, all will be rounded off to the same decimal place and will be written as simply 3.48.
  4. If the digit to be dropped happens to be 5 followed by some non-zero digit at any place then the preceding digit up to which the rounding off is desired will be increased by 1 (no matter if it is odd or even).
    • For example. if 3.485010 or 3.485125 when rounded off up to the second decimal place will be written as 3.49. Similarly, 3.475010 when rounded off up to the second decimal place will be written as 3.48.

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity

Rules For Rounding Off Digits Numerical Examples

Example 1. In an experiment of a simple pendulum a student i made several observations for the period of oscillation. His readings turned out to be 2.63s, 2.56s, 2.42s, 2.71s and 2.80 s. Find

  1. Meantime period of oscillations or the most accurate value of time period,
  2. Absolute errors in each reading,
  3. Mean absolute error,
  4. Fractional error and
  5. Percentage error.

Solution:

Given

In an experiment of a simple pendulum a student i made several observations for the period of oscillation. His readings turned out to be 2.63s, 2.56s, 2.42s, 2.71s and 2.80 s.

1. The mean time period of oscillation,

T = \(\frac{2.63+2.56+2.42+2.71+2.80}{5} \mathrm{~s}\)

= \(\frac{13.12}{5} \mathrm{~s}=2.624 \mathrm{~s} \approx 2.62 \mathrm{~s}\)

(rounded off to 2nd decimal place)

2. Taking 2.62 s as the true value, the absolute errors (true value – measured value) in the five readings are:

(2.62 – 2.63) s = -0.01 s ; (2.62 – 2.56) s = 0.06 s ;

(2.62 – 2.42) s = 0.20 s; (2.62 – 2.71) s = -0.09 s and

(2.62-2.80) s = -0.18 s

3. The (maximum) mean absolute error is, \((\delta T)_{\max } =\frac{(0.01+0.06+0.20+0.09+0.18)}{5} \mathrm{~s}\)

= \(\frac{0.54}{5} \mathrm{~s}=0.108 \mathrm{~s} \approx 0.11 \mathrm{~s}\)

4. The (maximum) fractional error is, \(\left(\frac{\delta T}{T}\right)_{\max }=\frac{0.11 \mathrm{~s}}{2.62 \mathrm{~s}} \approx 0.04p\)

5. The maximum percentage error is, \(\left(\frac{\delta T}{T}\right)_{\max } \times 100=0.04 \times 100=4 \%\)

∴ The value of T should be written as (2.62 ± 0.11) s

Example 2. The measured length and breadth of a rectangle are written as (5.7 ± 0.1) cm and (3.4 ± 0.2) cm respectively. Calculate the area of the rectangle with error limits.
Solution:

The measured length and breadth of a rectangle are written as (5.7 ± 0.1) cm and (3.4 ± 0.2) cm respectively.

Given l = 5.7 cm and Δl = 0.1 cm; b = 3.4 cm and Δb = 0.2 cm.

The area of the rectangle without error limit is,

A = l x b =(5.7 x 3.4) cm² = 19.38 cm² ≈ 19.4 cm²

Next, the fractional error in A is, \(\frac{\Delta A}{A}=\frac{\Delta l}{l}+\frac{\Delta b}{b}=\frac{0.1}{5.7}+\frac{0.2}{3.4} \approx(0.02+0.06)=0.08\)

∴ \(\Delta A=0.08 \times A \approx 0.08 \times 19.4 \mathrm{~cm}^2 \approx 1.6 \mathrm{~cm}^2\)

Hence, the area of the rectangle with an error limit is (19.4± 1.6) cm².

Example 3. The potential difference across the ends of a wire has been measured to be (100 ± 5) volt and the current in the wire as (10 ± 0.2) ampere. What is the percentage error in the computed resistance of the wire?
Solution:

The potential difference across the ends of a wire has been measured to be (100 ± 5) volt and the current in the wire as (10 ± 0.2) ampere.

Given, V = (100 ±5) volt and I =(10±0.2) ampere

Now, R = \(\frac{R}{I}\)

The maximum percentage error in R is, \(\left(\frac{\Delta R}{R}\right)_{\max } \times 100=\left(\frac{\Delta V}{V} \times 100\right)+\left(\frac{\Delta I}{I} \times 100\right)\)

= \(\left(\frac{5}{100} \times 100\right)+\left(\frac{0.2}{10} \times 100\right)\)

= 5% + 2% = 7%

Example 4. A student performing Searle’s experiment for finding the Young’s modulus Y of the material of a wire takes the following observations: Length of the wire (L) = 2.890 m, diameter of the wire (D) = 0.082 cm, mass suspended from the wire (M) = 3.00 kg, extension in the length of wire (l) = 0.087 cm. Calculate the maximum permissible error in the value of Y.
Solution:

Given

A student performing Searle’s experiment for finding the Young’s modulus Y of the material of a wire takes the following observations: Length of the wire (L) = 2.890 m, diameter of the wire (D) = 0.082 cm, mass suspended from the wire (M) = 3.00 kg, extension in the length of wire (l) = 0.087 cm.

The Young’s modulus of the material is given by, Y = \(\frac{4 M g L}{\pi D^2 l}\)

Here M = 3.00 kg  ∴ ΔM = 0.01 kg

L = 2.890 m ∴ ΔL = 0.001 m

D = 0.082 cm  ∴ ΔD = 0.001 cm

l = 0.087 cm ∴ Δl = 0.001 cm

The maximum permissible percentage error in Y is, \(\left(\frac{\Delta Y}{Y}\right)_{\max } \times 100= \left(\frac{\Delta M}{M} \times 100\right)+\left(\frac{\Delta L}{L} \times 100\right)\)

+ \(2\left(\frac{\Delta D}{D} \times 100\right)+\left(\frac{\Delta l}{l} \times 100\right)\)

= \(\frac{0.01}{3.00} \times 100+\left(\frac{0.001}{2.890} \times 100\right)\)

+ \(2 \times\left(\frac{0.001}{0.082} \times 100\right)+\left(\frac{0.001}{0.087} \times 100\right)\)

= \(0.33 \%+0.035 \%+2.44 \%+1.15 \%\)

= 4%

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity

Accuracy And Precision Of Measuring Instruments

Accuracy: The accuracy of a measuring instrument is decided by the closeness of the measured value of any physical quantity to the actual value which is known beforehand. Suppose the mass of a 100 g body, when measured using a common balance, reads 95 g. The measurement is, therefore, not accurate.

Precision: An instrument is precise when it repeats almost the same value when a physical quantity is measured a number of times. Precision, therefore, denotes how close the measured values of a physical quantity are with respect to one another. Suppose the mass of a 100 g body, when measured five times using a common balance, reads 90g, 96g, 92g, 93g, 97g. The measurement is, therefore, not precise.

Comparison Between Accuracy And Precision:

  1. By using an instrument only once, we can determine its accuracy. But to know its precision we need to take a number of measurements.
  2. Accuracy denotes how close the measured value is, relative to the actual value. Precision denotes how close the measured values are, relative to one another.
  3. The accuracy of an instrument depends upon the method of measurement but precision depends on random factors.

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity Set Of Measurments

Comparison Between Accuracy And Precision Example: Let us consider the examples in the following table, taking 100 g as standard:

The difference between accuracy and precision can be explained pictorially in the following simple example: Suppose, B is a target board and T is the target point marked on it. A shooter hits the target using two different rifles. The dots on the figure are the bullet marks. Now an observation of the target boards clearly shows that:

  1. The 1st rifle is more accurate since the bullet marks are all around the target point. However, the precision is low as the points are scattered over a large area. This means that the quality of the rifle is fairly low.
  2. The 2nd rifle is highly inaccurate since the bullet marks are far from the target point. But the precision is very high because the marks are very close to one another.
    • This indicates that it is a good-quality rifle, but its initial settings are somehow defective.
    • With proper adjustments, all the bullet marks can be brought close to the target point. In that case, the accuracy and precision would both be high.

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity Accurancy And Precision Comparison

 

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity Synopsis

The unit of a physical quantity can be obtained from the base units raised to certain numeric indices. The indices denote the dimensions of the physical quantity.

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity Dimensional Of Physical Quantity

  • When the dimension of a quantity is 1, the quantity is called a dimensionless physical quantity.
  • A dimensionless physical quantity can also have a unit, example, angle, or specific gravity.
  • The minimum length that can be measured by using a vernier scale or a screw gauge is the vernier constant or the least count respectively.
  • In a measurement, the digits in the measured value is said to be significant when, except the last digit, all other digits are correct.

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity Useful Relations For Solving Numerical Examples

Principle Of Dimensional Homogeneity: In any mathematical expression or equation involving physical quantities, each term must have the same dimension.

  • Vernier constant of a vernier scale = c
    • Length of the smallest division in the main scale = m Reading on the main scale = a
    • Length of y divisions in vernier scale = length of x divisions in a main scale.
    • Length of a rod measured by that vernier scale = l

Reading in vernier scale = b

  1. c = \(\frac{y-x}{y} \times m\)
  2. l = a + bc
  • Least count of a screw gauge = c
  • Total number of divisions on a circular scale = y
  • Reading on the linear scale = a
  • Pitch of the screw = x
  • Thickness of a lamina as measured by that screw gauge = d

Applications of Dimensional Formulas in Physics

Reading on the circular scale = b.

  1. c = \(\frac{x}{y}\)
  2. d = a+ bc
  • If n numbers of measured values of a physical quantity, are x1, x2, x3,….,xn then the average value or true value of the quantity, \(\bar{x}=\frac{x_1+x_2+x_3+\cdots+x_n}{n}\)
  • If the error in the average value of a physical quantity is ∈, then the absolute value of the quantity, x = \(\bar{x}\) ± ∈
  • where \(\epsilon=\frac{\left|x_1-\bar{x}\right|+\left|x_2-\bar{x}\right|+\left|x_3-\bar{x}\right|+\cdots+\left|x_n-\bar{x}\right|}{n}\)
  • Fractional error or relative error = \(\frac{\epsilon}{x}\)
  • Percentage error = \(\frac{\epsilon}{x}\) x 100.

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. Write the number of base units in SI.
Answer: Seven

Question 2. Is mole a base unit or a derived unit in SI?
Answer: Base

Question 3. What is the unit of thermal capacity in SI?
Answer: J K-1

Question 4. Express one parsec in terms of light year.
Answer: 1 parsec = 3.26 light year

Question 5. Light year is a _____ unit.
Answer: Fundamental

Question 6. Ampere is a _____ unit in SI.
Answer: Base

Question 7. Candela is a ______ unit in SI.
Answer: Base

Question 8. Parsec is a ____ unit.
Answer: Fundamental

Question 9. What is the dimension of a dimensionless physical quantity?
Answer: 1

Question 10. The relative density of lead is 11.3. What is its density in CGS and SI?
Answer: 11.3 g · cm-3 , 1.13 x 104 kg · m-3

Question 11.

  1. kg · m2 · s-2 = _______ g · cm2 · s-2
    Answer: 107
  2. 1 m = _______ light year.
    Answer: 10-16
  3. 3.0 m · s-2 = ______ km · h-2.
    Answer: 3.9 x 104
  4. G = 6.67 x 10-11 N • m2 • kg-2 = ______ cm3 • s-2 • g-1.
    Answer: 16.67 x 10-8

Question 12. If x = a+ bt+ ct², where x is in meters and t in seconds, what are the dimensions of b and c?
Answer: LT-1 and LT-2

Question 13. The equation of state of a real gas is (p+\(\frac{a}{V^2}\))(V-b) = RT, where p, V, and T are pressure, volume, and absolute temperature, respectively. Find out the dimension of b.
Answer: L3

Question 14. The Avogadro number is 6.022 x 1023. How many significant figures are there?
Answer: 4 figures: 6, 0, 2, 2

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity Assertion Reason Type Questions And Answers

These questions have statement 1 and statement 2. Of the four choices given below, choose the one that best describes the two statements.

  1. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true; statement 2 is a correct explanation for statement 1.
  2. Statement 1 is true, and statement 2 is true; statement 2 is not a correct explanation for statement 1.
  3. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is false.
  4. Statement 1 is false, and statement 2 is true.

Question 1.

Statement 1: It is obvious that the dimensions of all the terms must be the same in any mathematical relation between physical quantities.

Statement 2: Dimensions of a physical quantity are the powers to which the fundamental units should be raised to represent the unit of that physical quantity.

Question 2.

Statement 1: The quantity \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{\mu_0 \epsilon_0}}\) is dimensionally equal to velocity and also numerically equal to the velocity of light.

Statement 2: μ0 is the permeability and ∈0 is the permittivity of free space.

Question 3.

Statement 1: If y = ax b and Y = \(\frac{a}{b}\), then the fractional error of both y and Y is ±\(\left(\frac{\Delta a}{a}+\frac{\Delta b}{b}\right)\)

Statement 2: When two quantities are multiplied or divided their maximum relative errors are added up.

Question 4.

Statement 1: Pressure has the dimensions of energy density.

Statement 2: Energy density = y = \(\frac{\text { energy }}{\text { volume }}=\frac{M L^2 T^{-2}}{L^3}\) = \(M L^1 T^{-2}\)

Question 5.

Statement 1: UR and CR both have the same dimensions.

Statement 2: UR and CR both have the dimension of time.

Question 6.

Statement 1: The measurements of mass and length of a side of a cube involve, errors of 3% and 2%, respectively. The error in the density of its material, computed from this data, would be 9%.

Statement 2: If u = \(\frac{x^a y^b}{z^c}\), the fractional error in the computation of u is, \(\frac{\Delta u}{u}=a \frac{\Delta x}{x}+b \frac{\Delta y}{y}+c \frac{\Delta z}{z}\).

Question 7.

Statement 1: On a body of mass m, moving with a speed v in a circular path of radius r, the centripetal force is, F = \(\frac{m v^2}{r g}\).

Statement 2: In a mathematical expression involving physical quantities, each term on both sides of the equation must have the same dimension.

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity Match Column 1 And Column 2

Question 1. R = resistance, L = inductance, and C = capacitance. Match the quantities with their dimensions.

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity Match The Column Question 1

Answer: 1. D, 2. A, 3. B, 4. C

Question 2.

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity Match The Column Question 2

Answer: 1. D, 2. B, 3. A, 4. C

Question 3. The significant figures are given in column 2.

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity Match The Column Question 3

Answer: 1. C, 2. A, 3. D, 4. B

Question 4. Identify parts of the same dimensions

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity Match The Column Question 4

Answer: 1. A, 2. C, 3. B, 4. D

Question 5. Match the quantities with their dimensions

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity Match The Column Question 5

Answer: 1. B, 2. A, 3. D, 4. C

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity Comprehension Type Questions And Answers

Read the following passage carefully and answer the questions at the end of it.

Question 1. For real gases, van der Waals equation of state can be expressed as \(\left(p+\frac{a}{V^2}\right)(V-b)=R T\)= RT where p is the pressure, V is the molar volume and T is the absolute temperature of the given sample of gas and a, b and R are constants.

1. Dimension of a is

  1. ML5T-2
  2. L-1T-2
  3. L3
  4. L6

Answer: 1. ML5T-2

2. Dimension of b is

  1. ML5T-2
  2. ML-1T-2
  3. L3
  4. L6

Answer: 3. L6

3. Which of the following does not have the same dimension as that of RT?

  1. pV
  2. pb
  3. \(\frac{a}{V^2}\)
  4. \(\frac{a b}{V^2}\)

Answer: 3. \(\frac{a}{V^2}\)

4. Dimension of \(\frac{a b}{R T}\) is

  1. ML5T-2
  2. M0L0T0
  3. ML-1T-2
  4. None of these

Answer: 4. None of these

5. The dimension of RT is the same as that of

  1. Energy
  2. Force
  3. Specific heat
  4. Latent heat

Answer: 1. Energy

Question 2. It two physical quantities a and b are related by the equation a = kb, where it is a dimensionless constant, then the principle of dimensional homogeneity demands that a and b have the same dimension. However, the proportionality constant k cannot be determined by dimensional analysis only. It may, at most, be written that a ∝ b, if a and b are of the same dimension.

1. Time period (T) of oscillation of a liquid drop depends on its radius r, the density ρ, and the surface tension σ of the liquid. Then T is proportional to

  1. \(\sqrt{\frac{\rho r^2}{\sigma}}\)
  2. \(\sqrt{\frac{r^2}{\rho \sigma}}\)
  3. \(\sqrt{\frac{r^3 \rho}{\sigma}}\)
  4. \(\sqrt{\frac{\rho \sigma}{r^3}}\)

Answer: 3. \(\sqrt{\frac{r^3 \rho}{\sigma}}\)

2. If a particle of mass m executes simple harmonic motion with amplitude A and frequency f, then its energy is proportional to

  1. \(\frac{m f}{A^2}\)
  2. \(m f A^{-2}\)
  3. \(m f^2 A^{-2}\)
  4. \(m f^2 A^2\)

Answer: 4. \(m f^2 A^2\)

3. A coil of inductance L stores an amount of energy 1/2 LI² when a current I passes through it. The dimension of L is

  1. ML2T-1l2
  2. ML2T-1l-2
  3. ML2T-2l2
  4. ML2T-2l-2

Answer: 4. ML2T-2l-2

Measurement And Dimension Of Physical Quantity Integer Type Questions And Answers

The answer to each of the questions is a single-digit integer between 0 and 9.

Question 1. The values of the two resistors are (5.0± 0.2)kΩ and (10.0± 0.1)kΩ. What is the percentage error in the equivalent resistance when they are connected in parallel?
Answer: 7

Question 2. In a circuit, the generation of heat depends on resistance, current, and time for which the current flows. If the error in measuring resistance, current, and time are 1%, 2%, and 1% respectively, find the maximum percentage error in measuring the heat.
Answer: 6

Question 3. The period of oscillation of a simple pendulum is T = \(2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\). Length l is about 10 cm and is known to 1 mm accuracy. The period of oscillation is about 0.5 s. The time of 100 oscillations is measured with a wristwatch that shows the minimum interval of time as Is (i.e. least count = 1s). What is the percentage of accu¬racy in the determination of g?
Answer: 5

 

WBCHSE Class 11 Physics Change Of State Of Matter Notes

Properties Of Bulk Matter – Change Of State Of Matter Introduction

Matter

Matter generally exists in three states or phases—solid, liquid and gaseous. When a substance changes from one state to another, it is said to have undergone a change of state or phase change or phase transition.

As matter changes from the solid to its liquid state, the phenomenon is called melting or fusion. The reverse phenomenon i.e., change from the liquid to the solid state is termed as freezing or solidification.

Class 11 Physics Unit 7 Properties Of Matter Chapter 8 Change Of State Of Matter Change Of State Of Matter

  • Similarly, the change of a liquid to a gas, and the change from a gaseous state to the liquid state are called vaporisation and condensation respectively. Sublimation is the direct conversion from solid to gaseous state.
  • To bring about a change of state of a substance, the application of heat to or the extraction of heat from the substance is essential. The change of state of a substance, during which heat is absorbed by the substance is called a higher change of state (for example: melting and vaporisation).
  • On the other hand, the change of state of a substance, during which heat is extracted from the substance is called lower change of state (for example: solidification and condensation.

Read and Learn More: Class 11 Physics Notes

Properties Of Bulk Matter – Change Of State Of Matter Latent Heat

When water boils at 100°C it does not change its temperature until it completely converts into vapour. So the applied heat changes the water from its liquid state to its vapour state.

  • It, too, cannot be measured. Again, the temperature of a mass of at 100°C does not fall until the vapour completely converts into water by releasing heat.
  • Latent Heat Definition: The amount of heat extracted or applied to change the state of unit mass of a substance at a constant temperature, is called the latent heat of the substance for that change of state.

Change Of State Of Matter Notes

Hence, corresponding to different changes of state, latent heat are of four types:

  1. Latent heat of fusion
  2. Latent heat of solidification
  3. Latent heat of vaporisation
  4. Latent heat of condensation

Explanation of latent heat: The molecules of a solid substance are arranged in a fixed crystalline structure and therefore the solid has a definite shape. On the other hand, the molecules of a liquid are not so arranged and so they have no fixed shape.

  • Hence, change of a solid to its liquid state, or melting, means breaking up of the crystalline structure. Latent heat supplies the necessary energy for breaking this crystalline arrangement of molecules and hence there is no change in temperature.
  • Similarly, at atmospheric pressure, the intermolecular attraction in gases is very small in comparison to that in solids and in liquids. The intermolecular separations in gases are much higher.
  • Hence, change of a liquid to its gaseous state, i.e., vaporisation, means the total separation of the molecules from their mutual attraction. The energy required for this purpose is supplied by the latent heat.

Since the energy required to increase the intermolecular separation in changing a liquid to gas is much higher than that in changing a solid to liquid latent heat of vaporisation is higher than the latent heat of fusion for a substance.

Properties Of Bulk Matter – Change Of State Of Matter Triple Point

There is a pressure and temperature at which the solid, liquid and gaseous states of a substance can coexist in equilibrium. This is called the triple point of that substance.

The graph of pressure (p) versus temperature (T) for a substance is sometimes known as phase diagram. the phase diagrams of water and carbon dioxide respectively. Phase diagram generally divides the p- T plane in three regions—solid, liquid and gaseous regions.

Class 11 Physics Unit 7 Properties Of Matter Chapter 8 Change Of State Of Matter Phase Diagram Of Water And Carbondioxide

Lines BO, AO and CO are called sublimation curve, fusion curve and vaporisation curve respectively. The points on the sublimation curve denote the pressures and temperatures at which the solid and gaseous states of the substance coexist in equilibrium.

Similarly, the points on fusion curve denote pressures and temperatures at which the solid and liquid states coexist in equilibrium. Again, the points on vaporisation curve denote pressures and temperatures at which the liquid and gaseous states coexist in equilibrium.

Class 11 Physics Unit 7 Properties Of Matter Chapter 8 Change Of State Of Matter Phase Diagram Of Water And Carbondioxide-1

The curves BO, AO and CO meet at point O. The point O denotes the pressure and temperature at which the three states—solid, liquid and gaseous states— coexist in equilibrium. This means that the point O is the triple point. The pressure and temperature at triple point of water are 4.58 mm Hg and 0.01°C respectively.

Properties Of Bulk Matter – Change Of State Of Matter Triple Point Numerical Examples

Example 1. A copper calorimeter of mass 100 g contains a mixture of ice and water of total mass 40 g. A piece of copper of mass 100 g at 100°C is dropped in the calorimeter and finally, the temperature of the system becomes 10°C. Find the mass of ice in the initial ice-water mixture. Specific heat of copper = 0.09 cal · g-1 · °C-1 and latent heat of fusion of ice = 80 cal · g-1.
Solution:

Given

A copper calorimeter of mass 100 g contains a mixture of ice and water of total mass 40 g. A piece of copper of mass 100 g at 100°C is dropped in the calorimeter and finally, the temperature of the system becomes 10°C.

Let initial mass of ice in the calorimeter = xg.

Hence, mass of water initially present at 0°C was (40 – x) g.

Heat lost by the copper piece

= 100 x 0.09 x (100 – 10) = 810 cal

Heat gained by ice for melting = x x 80 = 80x cal and heat gained by that melted ice to raise its temperature to 10°C = xx 1 x10 cal = 10 xcal.

Heat gained by (40 – x) g of water to come up to 10°C = (40 – x) x 1 x 10 cal.

Heat taken by the calorimeter = 100 x 0.09 x 10 = 90 cal

As heat lost = heat gained,

80x+ 10x+ (40 -x) x 10 + 90 = 810 or, 80x = 320

∴  x = 4

∴ There was 4 g of ice in the mixture.

Change of State of Matter Notes for Class 11

Example 2. A calorimeter of water equivalent 50 g contains 250 g of water and 200 g of ice at 0°C. 200 g of steam at 100°C is passed through the ice-water mixture. Find the final temperature of the mixture and its total mass in the calorimeter. Latent heat of fusion of ice = 80 cal · g-1 and that of vaporisation of water = 540 cal · g-1.
Solution:

Given

A calorimeter of water equivalent 50 g contains 250 g of water and 200 g of ice at 0°C. 200 g of steam at 100°C is passed through the ice-water mixture.

Heat given up due to condensation of 200 g of steam at 100°C

= 200 x 540 = 108000 cal

Heat absorbed by 200 g ice at 0°C to form water at 0°C = 200 x 80 = 16000 cal.

Heat absorbed by the calorimeter, water and melted ice to reach 100°C from 0°C = (50 + 250 + 200) x 100 = 50000 cal

Maximum heat that could be taken in =16000 + 50000 = 66000 cal, which is much less than 108000 cal.

1. The final temperature of mixture is 100°C and the entire 200 g of steam is not condensed.

This mixture contains molten ice, water and x g (say) of condensed steam. Hence, (200 -x)g of steam passes through as steam.

2. Heat given up = x x 540 cal and heat taken in = 66000 cal.

∴ x x 540 = 66000

∴ x = \(\frac{66000}{540}=122.2 \mathrm{~g}\)

Total mass of the mixture = water + molten ice + con¬densed steam =250 + 200 + 122.2 = 572.2 g.

Example 3. A metal piece of mass 48.5 g at 10.7°C, placed in a flow of steam can condense 0.762 g of steam. Find the specific heat capacity of the metal. Latent heat of steam = 537 cal · g-1.
Solution:

Given

A metal piece of mass 48.5 g at 10.7°C, placed in a flow of steam can condense 0.762 g of steam.

Let the specific heat capacity of the metal be s cal · g-1 · °C-1.

Due to the flow of steam, the temperature of the metal rises to 100°C on condensation of 0.762 g of steam.

Hence, heat given up by the steam = 0.762 x 537 cal.

Heat received by the metal =48.5 x s x (100 – 10.7) cal

∴ Heat lost = heat gained

∴ 0.762×537 = 48.5 xs(100-10.7)

or, s = 0.094

Therefore, the specific heat capacity of the metal is 0.094 cal · g-1 · °C-1.

Class 11 Physics Class 12 Maths Class 11 Chemistry
NEET Foundation Class 12 Physics NEET Physics

Types of Phase Changes Explained

Example 4. In an Industrial unit, 10 kg of water is to be heated per hour from 20°C to 80°C. To achieve this, steam from a boiler at 150°C is circulated through a copper coil immersed in water. Steam condenses inside the coil, changes to water at 90°C and flows back to the boiler for recirculation. Estimate the mass of steam in kg, required per hour. Specific heat of steam = 1 cal · g-1 · °C-1 and latent heat of steam = 540 cal · g-1.
Solution:

Given

In an Industrial unit, 10 kg of water is to be heated per hour from 20°C to 80°C. To achieve this, steam from a boiler at 150°C is circulated through a copper coil immersed in water. Steam condenses inside the coil, changes to water at 90°C and flows back to the boiler for recirculation.

Amount of heat required per hour by 10 kg of water = 10 x 103 x 1 x (80 – 20) = 60 x 104 cal.

Let the mass of steam required be x kg.

Hence, heat given up by the steam

= x x 103 x 1 x (150- 100) + x x 103 x 540 + x x 103 x 1 x (100 – 90)

= x x 103 x (50 + 540 + 10) = x x 104 x 60 cal

According to the problem, x x 104 x 60 = 60 x 104

or x = 1

Thus the mass of tne steam requires per hour is 1 kg.

Latent Heat and Its Role in Phase Changes

Example 5. 10 g of a solid at -10°C needs 64 cal of heat to rise up to -2°C remaining in its solid state. To raise its temperature from -10°C to 1°C and 3°C (in liquid state), required heat are 880 cal and 900 cal respectively. If the specific heats of the material in its solid and liquid states be s1 and s2, calculate their values. If L is the latent heat of fusion and tm is the melting point in °C, then show that, L = 79 + 0.2 tm.
Solution:

Given

10 g of a solid at -10°C needs 64 cal of heat to rise up to -2°C remaining in its solid state. To raise its temperature from -10°C to 1°C and 3°C (in liquid state), required heat are 880 cal and 900 cal respectively. If the specific heats of the material in its solid and liquid states be s1 and s2

Heat required to change the temperature of the solid from -10°C to -2°C = 10s1{-2-(-10)} = 80s1.

According to the problem, 80s1 = 64.

∴ s1 = 0.8 cal · g-1 · °C-1

Difference in the heat required to raise the temperature of the object in its liquid state from -10°C to 1°C and from -10°C to 3°C = 10 x s2 x (3 – 1) = 20s2.

According to the problem, 20s2 = 900 – 880 = 20 or, s2 = 1 cal · g-1 · °C-1

If the melting point is tm, heat required to change the body in solid state at -10°C to its liquid state at 1°C

= 10 x s1{tm-(-10)} + 10L+ 10 x s2 x (1 – tm)

= 8(tm+10) + 10L +10(1 – tm) = 880

According to the problem,

8(tm+ 10) + 10L+ 10(1 – tm) = 880

or, 10L = 880 – 80- 10- 8tm+ 10tm = 790 +2tm

or, L=79 + 0.2tm (Proved).

Example 6. A piece of copper of mass 7.5 g at 27°C Is dropped into boiling liquid oxygen (boiling point = -183°C). Oxygen vapour thus formed occupies 1.83 L space at 20°C and at 750 minHg pressure. Calculate the latent heat of the vaporisation of oxygen. Specific heat of copper = 0.08 cal · g-1 · °C-1 and density of oxygen at STP 1.429 g · L-1.
Solution:

Given

A piece of copper of mass 7.5 g at 27°C Is dropped into boiling liquid oxygen (boiling point = -183°C). Oxygen vapour thus formed occupies 1.83 L space at 20°C and at 750 minHg pressure.

Let at STT, V2 = volume of the oxygen vapour formed.

Given p1 = 750 mmHg, T1 = 273 + 20 = 293 K,

⇒ \(V_1=1.83 \mathrm{~L}, p_2=760 \mathrm{mmHg}, T_2=273 \mathrm{~K}\)

Now, \(\frac{p_1 V_1}{T_1}=\frac{p_2 V_2}{T_2}\)

or, \(V_2=\frac{p_1 V_1 T_2}{T_1 p_2}\)

or, \(V_2=\frac{750 \times 1.83 \times 273}{293 \times 760}=1.68 \mathrm{~L}\)

∴ Mass of oxygen vapour formed = 1.68 x 1.429 g

Let L be the latent heat of the vaporisation of liquid oxygen. Heat taken for vaporisation = 1.68 x 1.429 x Leal

Heat given up by the piece of copper = 7.5 x 0.08(27 + 183) = 7.5 x 0.08 x 210 cal

∴ Heat supplied = heat absorbed

∴ 7.5 x 0.08 x 210 = 1.68 x 1.429 x L

or, L = \(\frac{7.5 \times 0.08 \times 210}{1.68 \times 1.429}=52.5 \mathrm{cal} \cdot \mathrm{g}^{-1}\)

Example 7. 100 g of water is raised from 24°C to 90°C with the help of steam. Determine the quantity of steam required for this purpose. Latent heat of steam = 540 cal · g-1.
Solution:

Given

100 g of water is raised from 24°C to 90°C with the help of steam.

Let the required quantity of steam = m g.

Amount of latent heat released by m g steam at 100°C = m x 540 = 540 m cal

Now, heat is released by this 100 g of condensed water at 100°C to reach 90°C = m x 1 x (100 – 90) = 10 m cal.

∴ Total heat released = 540 m + 10 m = 550 m cal

The amount of heat required by 100 g of water at 24 °C to rise up to 90°C = 100 x 1 x (90 – 24) = 6600 cal.

Heat lost = heat gained

∴ 550 m = 6600 or, m = 12

So, the quantity of steam required is 12 g

Example 8. A chunk of ice is continuously supplied with heat. After 2 s the ice begins to melt and in another 20 s the entire ice melts. Determine the initial temperature of ice. Specific heat of ice = 0.5 cal · g-1 · °C-1 and latent heat of fusion of ice = 80 cal · g-1.
Solution:

Given

A chunk of ice is continuously supplied with heat. After 2 s the ice begins to melt and in another 20 s the entire ice melts.

Let rate of supply of heat = x cal · s-1, initial temperature of ice = -θ° C and amount of ice = mg

Since, the ice begins to melt after 2 s, we can assume that the temperature of ice becomes 0°C at that time.

So, m x 0.5 x [0 – (-θ)] = 2x……(1)

or, mdθ = 4x

In the next 20 s the ice melts completely

∴ m x 80 = 20x …..(2)

So, from (1) and (2) we get, 6 = 16

∴ The initial temperature of the ice was -16°C.

Example 9. What will be the result of extraction of 69000 cal of heat from 100 g of steam at 100°C? Latent heat of condensation of steam = 540 cal • g-1
Solution:

Given

The amount of heat extracted from 100 g of steam at 100°C to condense it to water at 100°C = 100 x 540 = 54000 cal.

The amount of heat extracted to bring down the temperature of this water from 100°C to 0°C = 100 x 1 x 100 = 10000 cal.

Total heat extracted in the two steps = 54000 + 10000 = 64000 cal

The additional amount of heat extracted = 69000 – 64000 = 5000 cal

This will freeze some amount of water at 0°C.

The amount of frozen ice = \(\frac{5000}{80}\) = 62.5 g.

Hence, finally, there will be a mixture of 62.5 g of ice and (100-62.5) = 37.5 g of water at 0°C.

Example 10. kg of Ice at -20°C is mixed with 5 kg of water at 20°C in a container of negligible thermal capacity. Calculate the amount of water finally left in the container. Specific heat of water = 1 kcal · kg-1 °C-1, specific heat of ice = 0.5 kcal · kg °C-1 and latent heat of fusion of ice = 80 kcal · kg-1.
Solution:

Given

kg of Ice at -20°C is mixed with 5 kg of water at 20°C in a container of negligible thermal capacity.

Amount of heat given up by 5 kg of water to come at 0°C from 20°C = 5 x 1 x (20 – 0) = 100 kcal

Amount of heat taken by 2 kg ice at -20 °C to reach 0°C = 2 x 0.5 x {0 – (-20)} = 20 kcal

Amount of heat taken by 2 kg of ice at 0°C to melt into water at 0°C = 2 x 80 = 160 kcal

∴ Total amount of heat taken by 2 kg ice at -20°C to turn into the water at 0°C = 160 + 20 = 180 kcal

Obviously, the ice does not melt totally as the heat required to melt the total ice is greater than the heat given up.

∴ Amount of melted ice = \(\frac{100-20}{80}=\frac{80}{80}=1 \mathrm{~kg}\)

Hence, finally the amount of water in the container = 1 + 5 = 6 kg.

Practice Questions on Change of State for Class 11

Example 11. A closed vessel is partly filled with water. While extracting air from the vessel by a pump, due to quick evaporation water freezes Into Ice. What fraction of the Initial mass of water can be frozen by this process? I .a tent heat of solidification of Ice = 00 cal · g-1 and latent heat of vaporisation of water = 540 cal · g-1.
Solution:

Given

A closed vessel is partly filled with water. While extracting air from the vessel by a pump, due to quick evaporation water freezes Into Ice.

Let m1 = mass of water frozen and m2 = mass of water vaporised. Total mass of water (m) = m1 + m2.

Heat given out by m1g of water for changing to Ice = 80 m1 cal

And heat absorbed by m2g of water for evaporation = 540m2 cal

By calorimetric principle, 540m2 = 80m1

∴ \(m=m_1+\frac{80}{540} m_1=\frac{31}{27} m_1\)

∴ \(m_1=\frac{27}{31} m\)

∴ 27/31 part of the initial amount of water changes to ice.

Properties Of Bulk Matter – Change Of State Of Matter Synopsis

Latent heat: The amount of heat that should be applied to or extracted from a substance of unit mass for its change of state at a constant temperature, is called the latent heat for that particular change of state.

Melting point: The temperature at which a solid substance begins to melt under a definite pressure is called the melting point of that substance at that pressure.

Freezing point: The temperature at which a liquid substance begins to freeze under a definite pressure is called the freezing point of that substance at that pressure.

Eutectic temperature: The temperature at which a solution as a whole turns into a solid, is called the eutectic temperature of that solution.

  • Latent heat of fusion of ice is 80 cal • g-1.
  • For substances which undergo contraction in volume on melting, the melting point decreases due to increase in pressure, i.e., they melt at a lower temperature.
  • For substances which undergo expansion in volume on melting, the melting point increases due to increase in pressure, i.e. they melt at a higher temperature.
  • The phenomenon of melting of ice under pressure and its resolidification when the pressure is released, is called regelation.

Evaporation: When vaporisation of a liquid occurs slowly from the exposed surface of the liquid at any temperature, the process is called evaporation.

  • At a given temperature, if a closed space contains the maximum possible amount of vapour then that vapour is called saturated vapour. The pressure exerted by that vapour is called saturated vapour pressure.
  • At a given temperature, if a closed space contains less amount of vapour than the maximum possible amount of vapour that it can contain, then the vapour is called unsaturated vapour. The pressure exerted by that vapour is called unsaturated vapour pressure.
  • At constant temperature unsaturated vapour obevs Boyle’s law. It is seen that unsaturated vapour pressure is directly proportional to the temperature when volume remains constant, similar to the pressure law for gases.

Saturated vapour does not obey Boyles law nor the pressure law. The definite temperature for a gaseous substance, above which it cannot be liquefied by the application of pressure only, is called the critical temperature for that gaseous substance.

Boiling: When vaporisation of a liquid occurs rapidly throughout the whole of the liquid at a fixed temperature, the process is called boiling.

Sublimation: It is another form of vaporisation. When a solid turns into vapour directly without going through the liquid state, the process is known as sublimation.

Boiling point: The definite temperature at which a liquid boils under a fixed pressure is called the boiling point of that liquid.

Latent heat of vaporisation of water is 537 cal • g~1 .

The pressure and temperature at which the solid, liquid and gaseous states of a substance coexist in equilibrium is known as the triple point of the substance.

Properties Of Bulk Matter – Change Of State Of Matter Useful Relations For Solving Numerical Problems

During change of state, heat gained or lost by a substance, H = mL

[where, m =inass of the substance and L = latent heat for the change of state]

During change in temperature of a substance, heat gained or lost, H = mst

[where, s = specific heat of the substance, t = change in temperature]

Properties Of Bulk Matter – Change Of State Of Matter Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1. What is the heat gained or lost by a substance during its change of state at a constant temperature called?
Answer: Latent heat

Question 2. What is the unit of latent heat in CGS system?
Answer:

Unit of latent heat in CGS system

cal • g-1

Question 3. ‘Boiling point of water is higher at Darjeeling than that at Kolkata’ — state whether the statement is true or false.
Answer: False

Question 4. What is the latent heat of melting of ice in cal • g-1?
Answer:

Latent heat of melting of ice in cal • g-1

80

Question 5. What is the latent heat of the vaporisation of water in cal · g-1? Answer: 540

Question 6. Due to increase in pressure on ice, its melting point _________
Answer: Decreases

Question 7. Name the phenomenon of melting of ice under pressure and its resolidification on withdrawal of pressure.
Answer: Regelation

Question 8. Name the process of vaporisation that occurs slowly from the upper surface of a liquid at any temperature.
Answer: Evaporation

Question 9. The boiling point of a solution is _______ than the boiling point of the solvent.
Answer: Higher

Question 10. Cooking becomes rapid in a pressure cooker, because the _________ of water increases due to increase of superincumbent pressure.
Answer: Boiling point

Properties Of Bulk Matter – Change Of State Of Matter Assertion Reason type

Direction: These questions have statement 1 and statement 2. Of the four choices given below, choose the one that best describes the two statements.

  1. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true statement 2 is a correct explanation for statement 1.
  2. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true statement 2 is not a correct explanation for statement 1.
  3. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is false.
  4. Statement 1 is false, statement 2 is true.

Question 1.

Statement 1: In the pressure-temperature (p-T) phase diagram of water the slope of the melting curve is found to be negative.

Statement 2: Ice contracts on melting to water.

Answer: 1. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true statement 2 is a correct explanation for statement 1.

Question 2.

Statement 1: Melting of solid causes no change in internal energy.

Statement 2: Latent heat is the heat required to melt a unit mass of solid.

Answer: 4. Statement 1 is false, statement 2 is true.

Question 3.

Statement 1: Water kept in an open vessel will quickly evaporate on the surface of the moon.

Statement 2: The day temperature at the surface of the moon is higher than boiling point of water.

Answer: 2. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true statement 2 is not a correct explanation for statement 1.

Question 4.

Statement 1: If 1 g of ice is mixed with 1 g of water at 80 °C, then the final temperature of the mixture is 0°C.

Statement 2: Ice melts.

Answer: 2. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true statement 2 is not a correct explanation for statement 1.

Question 5.

Statement 1: The specific heat of ice at 0°C is infinite.

Statement 2: When heat is supplied to ice at 0°C, the change in temperature is zero as the ice melts.

Answer: 1. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true statement 2 is a correct explanation for statement 1.

Properties Of Bulk Matter – Change Of State Of Matter Match Column 1 And Column 2.

Question 1. In a container of negligible mass ra g of steam at 100°C is added to 100 g of water that has a temperature 20 °C. If no heat is lost to the surroundings at equilibrium, match the items given in Column 1 with that in Column 2.

Class 11 Physics Unit 7 Properties Of Matter Chapter 8 Change Of State Of Matter Match The Column Question 1

Answer: 1. C, 2. A, 3. D, 4. A

Question 2. Match the Column 1 with Column 2 according to data collected from the given graph.

Class 11 Physics Unit 7 Properties Of Matter Chapter 8 Change Of State Of Matter Data Collecting From The Graph

Class 11 Physics Unit 7 Properties Of Matter Chapter 8 Change Of State Of Matter Match The Column Question 2

Answer: 1.D, 2. A, 3. B, 4. C

Question 3. Match the Column 1 with Column 2 according to data collected from the given graph.

Class 11 Physics Unit 7 Properties Of Matter Chapter 8 Change Of State Of Matter Temperature And Time Graph

Class 11 Physics Unit 7 Properties Of Matter Chapter 8 Change Of State Of Matter Match The Column Question 3

Answer: 1. C, 2. A, 3. D, 4. B

 

WBCHSE Notes For Class 11 Physics Thermometry

Properties Of Bulk Matter Thermometry

Thermometry deals with the measurement of temperature.
Generally, on touching an object we have some sort of sensation. This sensation is known as thermal sensation which indicates the thermal condition of the object.

  1. This thermal sensation enables us to understand
  2. Whether a body is hot or cold, and
  3. How hot or how cold of a body is compared to other bodies. For example, thermal sensation gives the feeling that the water of a pond is hotter than ice, but is colder than water that has been heated for some time.

Again, if a cold body is in contact with a hot body, the cold one gets gradually hotter and the hot one gets gradually colder. After some time both of the bodies produce the same thermal sensation.

Read and Learn More: Class 11 Physics Notes

But thermal sensation often is not completely dependable because,

  1. It is unsafe to touch very hot or very cold bodies.
  2. The thermal sensation is different for objects that are in contact with one another or in the same environment for a long time. For instance, during the winter a piece of iron feels colder than a piece of wood.
  3. Thermal sensation is subjective and may differ from person to person.
  • Thus, it is essential to establish a measurement system that can determine the thermal condition of a body accurately and that is independent of a person, place, or environment.
  • To achieve this, a law, based on experiences and experimental results, was formulated. This law is the zeroth law of thermodynamics.
  • Before discussing the zeroth law of thermodynamics, we should gain a basic notion of two widely used terms in thermal science—thermal contact and thermal equilibrium.

Comparative Analysis of Temperature Scales

Thermal contact: Thermal contact may exist between two objects even when they do not touch each other. For example, a cup of hot tea kept on a table for quite some time ceases to remain hot.

This happens because the cup of tea and the other objects in the room have thermal contact among them and after a while they produce the same thermal sensation. In the study of thermal science, thermal contact is abbreviated as contact.

Thermal equilibrium: In general, on touching different objects and feeling the same thermal sensation, we say that these objects are in thermal equilibrium. For example, the objects kept in the same room are in thermal equilibrium most of the time.

  • Let us consider various objects that are not in thermal equilibrium. If these objects are kept in thermal contact of one another, they attain thermal equilibrium on their own.
  • For example, a cup of hot tea kept on a table for quite some time is seen to attain thermal equilibrium with other objects in the room.

WBCHSE Notes For Class 11 Physics Thermometry

Properties Of Bulk Matter – The Zeroth Law Of Thermodynamics

Thermodynamics is the branch of physics that discusses the mutual conversion between heat and work and the changes in the physical properties of different bodies caused by this type of conversion.

  • Thermodynamics is based on two fundamental laws—the first and the second laws of thermodynamics. After the two laws were formulated and put in use, the need for the identification of a fundamental property of matter was felt. This property is the temperature of a body.
  • Hence, a law was to be formulated that would define temperature. It was reasonable that this law should precede the already existing first and second laws of thermodynamics. Thus this law was named the zeroth law of thermodynamics.

Statement of Zeroth law: If two bodies are sepa¬rately in thermal equilibrium with a third body, then the first two bodies are also in thermal equilibrium with each other.

  • For example, if A and B are separately in thermal equilibrium with C, then according to the zeroth law, A and B are also in thermal equilibrium with each other.
  • This may appear to be an obvious truth and we are tempted to believe that the statement need not be considered as a separate law. But it is not true our experiences dictate that this type of argument does not always hold. For example,
  1. if A and B are two iron pieces and C is a magnet, then both A and B will be attracted by C, but A and B will not attract each other.
  2. When each of two straight lines is per¬pendicular to a third straight line, the first two are not neces¬sarily perpendicular to each other.

Thus, we can understand that zeroth law is not an obvious truth, but has been formulated as a ‘law’ on the basis of experiments and experiences.

Analogical examples of the zeroth law:

1. a, b and c are three line segments. Out of these lines, if a is equal to c and b is also equal to c, we know from our experience that a and b are equal to each other.

There exists a property whose value is the same for all three line segments. This property is the length of a line segment. Hence, equality in length is the condition for the three line segments to be equal.

Class 11 Physics Unit 7 Properties Of Matter Chapter 4 Thermometry Analogical Examples Of Zeroth Law

2. a, b, and c are three straight lines on a plane. a is parallel to c and b is also parallel to c. We know that a and b will also be parallel to each other, a, b, and c must have the same gradient or slope, and thus, equality in slope is the condition for the lines a, b, and c to be parallel to one another.

WBBSE Class 11 Thermometry Study Notes

Significance Of The Zeroth law: From the analogies discussed above, it can be concluded that there must exist a characteristic property of every body, whose equality dictates thermal equilibrium among the bodies. This characteristic property is the temperature of a body.

Significance Of The Zeroth Law Definition: Temperature is a physical property of everybody, whose equality is the necessary and sufficient condition for thermal equilibrium among the bodies.

According to this definition,

  1. All substances kept in a room for a long time are at the same temperature,
  2. Temperature of hot water is different from that of cold water,
  3. A hot body and a cold body, kept in thermal contact, attain the same temperature after some time, etc.

Properties Of Bulk Matter – Thermometer

An instrument that measures the temperature of a body is called a thermometer.

From zeroth law we see that, to determine the thermal equilibrium between A and B, a third body C can be used as a reference body. In this case C acts as a thermometer.

Temperature scale: A scale of temperature is needed to measure the temperature of a body accurately. To draw up a scale we follow the norm that a hot body is at a higher temperature while a cold body is at a lower temperature.

It implies that when a hot and a cold body are in contact, the temperature of the hot body will decrease and that of the cold body will increase. When the temperatures of both bodies become equal, the bodies attain thermal equilibrium.

Fixed point: To set up a temperature scale, one or more conveniently reproducible, well-established temperatures are chosen as standard temperatures. These fixed tempera¬tures are called the fixed points.

Primary thermometer: There are several kinds of thermometers for practical use. There are liquid thermometers (mercury or alcohol), ideal gas thermometers, platinum-resis-tance thermometers etc. Among these, there is a special kind of thermometer that is used to deduce the accurate value of different fixed points.

  • This is known as a primary thermometer. Using these fixed points, other thermometers are calibrated. The universally accepted primary thermometer is the ideal gas thermometer.
  • The thermometer contains a gas, under ideal conditions, kept at a constant volume. The property of the gas, that changes with temperature, is its pressure.

As such, pressure is called the thermometric property of the gas. The thermometer is also known as a constant-volume gas thermometer. To fix the ideal gas temperature scale, the temperature (T) is assumed to be proportional to the pres¬sure (p) of the gas. So,

T ∝ p, or, T = kp, where k is an unknown constant.

  • To know the value of k, one fixed point should be chosen and its temperature allotted with a definite value. This fixed point, known as the fundamental fixed point, is the triple point of water (discussed below).
  • The value of its temperature is universally accepted as 273.16. Later, Kelvin introduced a thermodynamic temperature scale, which exactly coincides with the ideal gas scale.

So the unit of temperature is chosen as kelvin or K; then the temperature of the triple point of water is T0 = 273.16 K.

Triple point of water: The triple point of water is the state at which ice, water, and water vapour can coexist in thermal equilibirum. At this state, the pressure and the temperature are fixed so it is a fixed point.

  • The value of pressure at this fixed point is 4.58 mm of Hg the value of temperature is assigned as 273.16 K in the ideal gas scale (see the chapter ‘Change of State of Matter’).
  • Unless a very accurate value of temperature is required, we may use the number 273 in place of 273.16 for the triple point of water. In that case, C = K – 273; so practically there is no difference between the values of the triple point of water and ice point (see the table below).

Ideal gas scale: Scaling of the ideal gas thermometer is done considering the triple point of water as 273.16. Then temperatures of a few more fixed points are measured using this scale. The scale obtained from this is called ideal gas scale. Nowadays, Kelvin (K) is used as the unit instead of degree kelvin in ideal gas scale.

Class 11 Physics Unit 7 Properties Of Matter Chapter 4 Thermometry Fixed Point And Temperature

Thermometry Applications in Real Life

The following table lists some of the important fixed points and their temperatures measured and ascertained by an ideal gas thermometer. All fixed points other than the triple point of water are called secondary fixed points.

Secondary thermometer: All thermometers, other than the ideal gas thermometer, are secondary thermome¬ters. They are called secondary because they are calibrated according to the values of temperatures of fixed points already determined by an ideal gas thermometer.

  • So all secondary thermometers actually obey the ideal gas temperature scale. However, it should be noted that secondary thermometers should never be regarded as less reliable or less efficient.
  • Rather, they are often highly accurate and very easy to use. The most important of them are liquid ther¬mometer and resistance thermometer.

The four scales of temperature—Celcius, Fahrenheit, Reaumur, and Kelvin Fixed points and symbols:

Class 11 Physics Unit 7 Properties Of Matter Chapter 4 Thermometry Temperature Scale

Equivalence of the temperatures recorded in the four different scales mentioned above: Let C, F, R, and K be the temperature of a body as recorded in three different scales viz., Celsius, Fahrenheit, Reaumur, and Kelvin respectively. Then,

⇒ \(\frac{C-0}{100-0}=\frac{F-32}{212-32}=\frac{R-0}{80-0}=\frac{K-273}{373-273}\)

or, \(\frac{C}{5}=\frac{F-32}{9}=\frac{R}{4}=\frac{K-273}{5}\)

Equivalence of the temperature recorded in any two different scales: Let the temperature of a body in scale A be p and that in scale B be q. Then,

⇒ \(\frac{p \text {-lower fixed point in scale } A}{\text { upper fixed point in } A \text {-lower fixed point in } A}\)

= \(\frac{q \text {-lower fixed point in scale } B}{\text { upper fixed point in } B \text {-lower fixed point in } B}\)

 Properties Of Bulk Matter Heat

Heat Definition: The energy transferred from one body to another only because of a difference in temperature 1 between them is called heat.

Heat Discussion:

  • It is to be noted that in thermodynamics, temperature has been define, first. Then heat energy is defined based on the difference in temperature.
  • Hence, a statement like, “Heat is the cause and temperature is the effect” is not applicable in thermodynamics. In fact, there is no real need for such a simplification.
  • The accepted convention for the direction of flow of heat is that, it flows from a body at a higher temperature to a body at a lower temperature.
  • The statement, ‘only because of a difference in tempera-ture’, has been used in the definition of heat because difference in other physical properties, between two bodies may cause a flow of other forms of energy. For example, a difference in pressure between two bodies brought in contact causes the transfer of mechanical energy.
  • While temperature is an intrinsic property of a body, ‘heat’ is not ‘Heat of a body’ is a meaningless concept. Heat energy manifests itself only when it is transferred from one body to another.
  • Hence, heat is energy in transit. The statement, ‘temperature of a body is 20 °C ’, is meaningful. But the ‘heat of a body is 200 cal ’ is meaningless. Instead ‘heat transferred from A to B is 200 cal ’ is a correct statement.
  • The amount of heat contained in a body can never be measured. What we measure in calorimetry is the amount of heat absorbed or liberated by a body not the ‘heat content’ of the body.

Thermal equilibrium: When two or more bodies are in thermal contact and the temperature of every one of them is the same, then no heat is exchanged among them. This state is called thermal equilibrium.

Class 11 Physics Class 12 Maths Class 11 Chemistry
NEET Foundation Class 12 Physics NEET Physics

Unit 7 Properties Of Bulk Matter Chapter 4 Thermometry Heat Numerical Examples

Example 1. What is the temperature which has the same value in Celsius and in Fahrenheit scales?
Solution:

The temperature which has the same value in Celsius and in Fahrenheit scales

Let the temperature be x degree. As per the question C = F = x

From the relation for equivalence of temperature scales, we
know \(\frac{C}{5}=\frac{F-32}{9}\)

∴ \(\frac{x}{5}=\frac{x-32}{9}\) or, 9x = 5x- 160

or, 4x = -160

∴ x = -40

∴ -40 °C = -40 °F

Example 2. A thermometer has its lower fixed point and upper fixed point marked as 0.5 and 101 respectively. What is the reading on this thermometer at 30 °C?
Solution:

A thermometer has its lower fixed point and upper fixed point marked as 0.5 and 101 respectively.

Let the reading be t degree.

∴ \(\frac{t-0.5}{101-0.5}=\frac{C}{100} \text { or, } \frac{t-0.5}{100.5}=\frac{30}{100}\)

or, 10t-5 = 301.5 or, t = 30.65 degree

Hence, the faulty thermometer reads 30.65 degree.

Step-by-Step Solutions to Thermometry Problems

Example 3. A faulty thermometer reads -0.5 °C in melting ice and 99 °C in boiling water at the pressure of 747 mm of Hg. What is the correct temperature when the faulty thermometer reads 45 °C? The actual boiling point of water is 99 °C at 734 mm of Hg.
Solution:

A faulty thermometer reads -0.5 °C in melting ice and 99 °C in boiling water at the pressure of 747 mm of Hg.

Actual boiling point of water at the pressure of 760 mm of Hg is 100 °C.

Now, a decrease in pressure by (760 – 734) or 26 mm of Hg decreases the boiling point of water by (100 – 99) = 1 °C.

∴ The decrease in pressure by (760-747) or, 13 mm of Hg decreases the boiling point of water by 1/26 x 13 = 0.5 °C.

Hence, the boiling point of water at 747 mm of Hg should be (100-0.5) = 99.5 °C.

Let the correct temperature be x °C, when the faulty ther-mometer reads 45 °C.

Hence, \(\frac{x}{99.5}=\frac{45-(-0.5)}{99-(-0.5)}=\frac{45.5}{99.5} \quad therefore x=45.5^{\circ} \mathrm{C} \text {. }\)

Temperature of the freezing mixture = -23°C

Example 4. A centimetre scale is attached with a thermometer of uniform bore. The thermometer reads 7.3 cm in melting ice, 23.8 cm in boiling water and 3.5 cm in a freezing mixture. What is the temperature of this freezing mixture in °C?
Solution:

A centimetre scale is attached with a thermometer of uniform bore. The thermometer reads 7.3 cm in melting ice, 23.8 cm in boiling water and 3.5 cm in a freezing mixture.

The lower and the upper fixed points correspond to readings of 7.3 cm and 23.8 cm respectively. The tem­perature of the freezing mixture in this scale corresponds to a scale reading of 3.5 cm.

Let C be the freezing mixture’s temperature in degree Cel­sius.

Temperature of the freezing mixture = – 23.03 °C.

Alternative solution: When the temperature increases from 0 °C to 100 °C, the corresponding change in scale reading = 23.8 – 7.3 = 16.5 cm.

So when the temperature changes by 1 °C, the corresponding changes in scale reading = 16.85/100 = 0.165 cm

Let the temperature of the freezing mixture =-x °C

So change in temperature in Celcius scale = 0 – (-x) = x °C

The corresponding change in scale reading = 0.165x cm.

According to the question,

0. 165X = 7.3-3.5 or, x = 38/0.165 = 23.03

So the temperature of the freezing mixture is -23.03 °C.

Example 5. A substance is heated from 30 °C to 75 °C. What is the change in its temperature on the Fahrenheit scale and on the Kelvin scale?
Solution:

A substance is heated from 30 °C to 75 °C.

Let a temperature be C on the Celsius scale, F on the Fahrenheit scale and T on the Kelvin scale. We can write,

F = 9/5C + 32 ….(1)

and T = C+273 ….(2)

Differentiating equation (1) we get,

⇒ \(\Delta F=\frac{9}{5} \Delta C\)

Here, ΔC = 75 – 30 = 45

∴ ΔF = 9/5 x 45 = 81.

Similarly, by differentiating equation (2) we get, ΔT = ΔC = 45.

Common Thermometry Questions and Answers

Example 6. The graph between Celcius and Fahrenheit temperature of a body is shown. Show that the angle made by the graph with Celsius axis is \(\sin ^{-1} \frac{9}{\sqrt{106}}\)

Class 11 Physics Unit 7 Properties Of Matter Chapter 4 Thermometry Graph Between Celcius And Fahrenhit Temperature

Solution:

The graph between Celcius and Fahrenheit temperature of a body is shown.

We know, \(\frac{C}{5}=\frac{F-32}{9} \text { or, } C=\frac{5}{9}(F-32) \text { or, } F=\frac{9}{5} C+32\)

This is the equation of a straight line, Here the slope of the line, tanθ = 9/5

Class 11 Physics Unit 7 Properties Of Matter Chapter 4 Thermometry Scope Of The Line

∴ OA = \(\sqrt{5^2+9^2}=\sqrt{106}\)

∴ \(\sin \theta=\frac{9}{\sqrt{106}}\)

or, \(\theta=\sin ^{-1} \frac{9}{\sqrt{106}}\)

 

Unit 7 Properties Of Bulk Matter Chapter 4 Thermometry Synopsis

Zeroth law of thermodynamics: If two bodies are separately, in thermal equilibrium with a third body, then the first two bodies are also in thermal equilibrium with each other.

  • Temperature is a physical property of any system, whose equality indicates thermal equilibrium between different systems.
  • The instrument that measures the temperature of a body is called a thermometer.
  • The energy transferred from one body to another due to the difference of temperature only is called heat.
  • Thermal equilibrium: When two or more bodies are in thermal contact and the temperature of each body is the same, then no heat is exchanged among them. This state is called thermal equilibrium.

Unit 7 Properties Of Bulk Matter Chapter 4 Thermometry Useful Relations For Solving Numerical Problems

If any temperature in Celsius, Fahrenheit and Kelvin scales be C, F and K respectively, then

⇒ \(\frac{C}{5}=\frac{F-32}{9}=\frac{K-273}{5}\)

Relation of temperature readings in any two scales: If any temperature on one scale be p and that on some other scale be q then,

⇒ \(\frac{p-\text { lower fixed point in the first scale }}{\text { upper fixed point in that scale }- \text { lower fixed point in that scale }}\)

= \(\frac{q-\text { lower fixed point in the second scale }}{\text { upper fixed point in that scale }- \text { lower fixed point in that scale }}\)

Unit 7 Properties Of Bulk Matter Chapter 4 Thermometry Match Column 1 And Column 2

Question 1. Ranges of different thermometers are given below.

Class 11 Physics Unit 7 Properties Of Matter Chapter 4 Thermometry Match The Column

Answer: 1. 3, 2. D, 3. B, 4. A

Unit 7 Properties Of Bulk Matter Chapter 4 Thermometry Comprehension Type Questions

Read the following passage carefully and answer the questions at the end of it.

Question 1. Perhaps the highest temperature material you will ever see is the sun’s outer atmosphere or corona. At a temperature of about 2 x 106 °C or 3.6 x 106 °F, the corona glows with a light that is literally unearthly. But because corona is also very thin, its light is rather faint. You can only see the corona during a total solar eclipse when the sun’s disk is covered by the moon.

1. Is it accurate to say that the corona contains heat?

  1. Yes
  2. No
  3. In particular, conditions, say during solar eclipse, it contain heat
  4. None of these

Answer: 1. Yes

2. What is the highest temperature which can be created on earth for a sufficiently long time?

  1. 1500°C
  2. 2000°C
  3. 2500°C
  4. 3000 K

Answer: 4. 3000 K

3. To measure high temperatures > 2500°C we use

  1. Constant volume gas thermometer
  2. Thermocouple
  3. Resistance thermometer
  4. Pyrometer

Answer: 4. Pyrometer

Unit 7 Properties Of Bulk Matter Chapter 4 Thermometry Integer Type Questions

In these type, the answer to each of the questions is a single-digit integer ranging from 0 to 9.

1. A Celsius and a Fahrenheit thermometer are put in a hot bath. The reading of the Fahrenheit thermometer is just 29/5 times the reading on the Celsius thermometer. What is the temperature of the bath in Celsius?
Answer: 8

Hydrostatics Notes

Hydrostatics Fluid

Hydrostatics Basics and Definitions

Fluid

Liquids and gases do not have any definite shape of their own and thus can change their shapes easily. As these substances are not rigid, they do not have the capability to restore their original shape.

For this reason, liquids and gases at rest cannot resist the tangential force acting on them, and due to the application of even a slight tangential force, these substances begin to flow. Since liquids and gases can flow easily, they are called fluids.

  • The branch of physics in which the characteristic properties of fluids at rest are studied is called hydrostatics.
  • A liquid has a volume but no definite shape. It takes the shape of the container in which it is kept. But gases have neither a definite shape nor a volume of their own they usually take the shape and the volume of their container.
  • Consequently, a gas can be compressed easily by applying pressure on it, while a liquid is almost incompressible.
  • Any substance which has no definite shape and has the ability to flow is called fluid. Thus, both liquids and gases are fluids.

Fluids are everywhere around us. Earth has an envelope of air, and two third of earth’s surface is covered with water. Fluids are a phases of matter and include liquids, gases, plasmas and to some extent, plastic solids.

The fundamental difference between solid and liquid:

  1. Shearing stress causes a change in the shape of a solid without changing its volume whereas fluids offer little resistance to shearing stress. The shearing stress of fluids is about million times smaller than that of solids.
  2. A fluid can exert or withstand a force in a direction perpendicular to its surface. So a fluid does have a bulk modulus of rigidity.

The fundamental difference between liquid and gas: A liquid is incompressible and has a definite volume and a free surface of its own. However, a gas is compressible and it expands to occupy all the space available to it.

Hydrostatics Notes

Hydrostatics Archimedes Principle

Hydrostatic Force on Submerged Objects

When a body is totally or partly immersed in a liquid or gas at rest, it appears to lose a part of its weight. This apparent loss of weight is equal to the weight of the liquid or gas displaced by the body. This is Archimedes’ principle.

It is to be noted, that Archimedes’ principle is related to the weight of a body. So, this principle is not applicable for a body in a weightless condition. The weight of the body in an artificial satellite or in a freely falling situation is zero. So in these cases, Archimedes’ principle is not applicable.

Application of Archimedes’ Principle: We can determine the following with the help of Archimedes’ principle:

  1. The volume of a solid of any shape
  2. The density of a substance
  3. The amount of the constituent elements in a piece of alloy made of two elements

For the determination of the above things, the choice of the liquid used should be such that

  1. The body should not be soluble in that liquid and
  2. The body under experiment should not react chemically with the liquid.

Hydrostatics Principles with Examples

Class 11 Physics Class 12 Maths Class 11 Chemistry
NEET Foundation Class 12 Physics NEET Physics

1. Determination of the volume of a solid of any shape: The method described below is the simplest one to find the volume of a body of any shape.

The body is heavier than the liquid: Let the weight of the body in air be W1 and its weight when totally immersed in the liquid be W2.

According to Archimedes’ principle,

W1 – W2 = apparent loss in the weight of the body

= weight of the liquid displaced by the body

= weight of the liquid equal to the volume of the body

If the density of the liquid is ρ, then volume of the displaced liquid = \(\frac{W_1-W_2}{\rho g}\)

= volume of the body……(1)

The body is lighter than the liquid: in this case, a sinker is used to immerse the lighter body experiment completely in the liquid.

Let the weogth of the body in air be W1

the weight of the sinker inside the liquid be W2 and the weight the body with the sinker inside the liquid = W3

According to Archimedes’ principle, W1 – (W3 – W2)

= apparent weight loss of the body

= weight of the liquid displaced by the body

= weight of equal volume of the liquid If the density of the liquid is ρ, then the volume of the displaced liquid = \(\frac{W_1-\left(W_3-W_2\right)}{\rho g}\)

∴ volume of the body….. (2)

2. Determination of density of a substance: Let the weight of a body in air be W1 when it is immersed in a liquid of density ρ, it weighs W2.

According to Archimedes’ principle, from equation (1) we get the volume of the body, V = \(\frac{W_1-W_2}{\rho g}\)

∴ Density of the material of the body,

D = \(\frac{\text { mass of the body }}{\text { volume of the body }}=\frac{W_1 / g}{V}=\frac{W_1 \rho}{W_1-W_2}\)…..(3)

From the measured value of density, the purity of a metal can be known. If the measured value of the density is equal to the actual density of that metal, then we can say that the metal is pure; otherwise it is impure.

3. Determination of the amounts of constituent elements in a piece of alloy made of two elements: Let us assume that an alloy is made of two metals A and B. Let the mass of the alloy in air be W1 and its weight when immersed completely in water be W2.

According to Archimedes’ principle, volume of the alloy V = \(\frac{W_1-W_2}{\rho g}\)

Let us assume that the amount of masses and the densities of metals A and B in the alloy are ma, mb, and pa, pb respectively.

∴ Volume of metal \(A=\frac{m_a}{\rho_a}\)

and volume of metal B = \(\frac{m_b}{\rho_b}=\frac{\left(W_1 / g\right)-m_a}{\rho_b}\)

∴ \(\frac{m_a}{\rho_a}+\frac{\left(W_1 / g\right)-m_a}{\rho_b}=\frac{W_1-W_2}{\rho g}\)

or, \(m_a\left(\frac{1}{\rho_a}-\frac{1}{\rho_b}\right)=\frac{W_1-W_2}{\rho g}-\frac{W_1}{\rho_b g}\)

or, \(m_a=\frac{1}{g}\left(\frac{W_1-W_2}{\rho}-\frac{W_1}{\rho_b}\right) \frac{\rho_a \rho_b}{\rho_b-\rho_a}\)

So, if the values of W1 , W2, ρ, ρa, and ρb are known, then the amount of metal A can be determined from equation (4), and from this, the amount of metal B can be determined.

Hydrostatics Synopsis

Density Definition:

The mass per unit volume of a substance is called its density.

  • The ratio of the density of a solid or a liquid substance to the density of pure water at 4°C is called the specific gravity of that substance.
  • , The ratio of the mass of a certain volume of any solid or liquid substance to the mass of an equal volume of pure water at 4°C is called the specific gravity of that substance.
  • The force acting normally on unit area of a surface is called pressure.
  • The normal force exerted by a liquid on any surface in contact with it is called the thrust of the liquid.

The characteristics of pressure at a point in a liquid at rest are:

  1. The pressure at a point in a liquid at rest is the same in all directions.
  2. The pressure at all points on the same horizontal level in a liquid at rest is the same.
  3. The pressure at a point in a liquid at rest is directly proportional to the depth of that point inside the liquid.

The free surface of a liquid at rest is always horizontal.

If two immiscible liquids in a U-tube are in equilibrium, then the heights of the liquids from the plane of separation are inversely proportional to the densities of the liquids.

The free surface of a liquid at rest in connected vessels remains in the same horizontal plane.

Key Formulas in Hydrostatics

Pascal’s law: The pressure applied at any point of a confined fluid is transmitted with undiminished magnitude in all directions throughout the fluid and acts normally on the surface in contact with the fluid.

  • The ability of a liquid or gas at rest to exert an upward force on a body immersed in that fluid is called buoyancy.
  • The upward thrust exerted on a body by a liquid or gas immersed partly or totally in it is called the buoyant force.
  • If the liquid with the body remains in a weightless state, then no buoyant force acts on the body.
  • The point where the centre of gravity of the liquid or gas lies before it is displaced by a body immersed in it is the centre of buoyancy or centre of floatation of the immersed body.

Archimedes’ principle: When a body is immersed partly or totally in a liquid or gas at rest, the body appears to lose a part of its weight. This apparent loss in weight is equal to the weight of the liquid or gas displaced by the body.

In the case of a body immersed in a liquid at rest, let the weight of the body be W1 and the buoyant force acting on the body be W2.

If W1 > W2, then the body sinks in the liquid.

If W1 = W2, then the body remains floating at any position inside the liquid being totally immersed in the liquid.

If W1 <W2, the body moves up through the liquid and remains floating partly submerged in the liquid.

A floating body has no apparent weight.

  1. Condition of floatation: The weight of a floating body must be equal to the weight of the liquid displaced by the body.
  2. Condition of equilibrium: The centre of gravity and the centre of buoyancy must lie on the same vertical plane.
  • For a floating body in a tilted position, the vertical line drawn through the centre of buoyancy cuts the central line at a point called the metacentre of the body.
  • For stable equilibrium of a floating body, the metacentre of the body should lie above its centre of gravity.

Experimental verification of Hooke’s law Notes

Elasticity Property Of Matter

Elastic Limit Formula

From our common experience, we know that when a rubber cord is pulled, it increases in length. But in order to increase the length of a steel wire of same diameter by the same amount, a greater force needs to be applied.

  • When equal and opposite external forces act on a body, the different point masses of the body undergo relative displacements. As a result, the body undergoes a change in its shape or size, or both.
  • In this condition, a reaction force develops inside the body which opposes the change. If this change lies within a definite limit then the body regains its original state once the forces are withdrawn.
  • The property which opposes deformation is present in all materials. This general property of matter is known as elasticity (or the elastic property of matter).

Elastic Definition: The property by virtue of which a body resists the deformation in shape or volume or both due to external forces acting on it and regains its original shape or volume when these external forces are withdrawn is called elasticity. This property is present in every material, irrespective of whether it is solid, liquid, or gas.

Read and Learn More: Class 11 Physics Notes

Elasticity of rubber and Steel: From the viewpoint of physics, a body is said to be more elastic if it has a greater ability to resist deformation against the external force.

  • The greater the external force necessary to produce a definite change in the size or shape of a body, the more elastic is the material of the body.
  • As mentioned earlier, in order to produce an equal deformation in a steel wire and a rubber wire of the same dimensions, a greater force is necessary in the of the steel wire. For this reason, steel is more elastic than rubber.

Factors Affecting Elasticity:

  1. The presence of impurities in a metal changes its elastic property.
  2. If a metal is deformed frequently, then its elasticity decreases. For example, if a thick copper wire is often twisted, it becomes hard and brittle.
  3. The elasticity of a metal changes with temperature. Usually, its elasticity decreases when temperature increases, and vice versa.
  4. An exception to this rule occurs in the case of invar —whose elasticity does not change with any change in temperature. Again if a metal is first heated and then cooled, i.e., it is softened, its elasticity gradually decreases

Experimental verification of Hooke's Law Notes

Elasticity Some Useful Definitions

Perfectly elastic body: If after the withdrawal of external forces, a body completely regains its original shape and volume, then it is called a perfectly elastic body.

  • In real life, however, a body cannot be perfectly elastic for all magnitudes of external forces. Up to a certain limiting value of external force, a body behaves as a perfectly elastic body.
  • This limit is known as the elastic limit for the material of the body. Different materials have different elastic limits. For example, the elastic limit of steel is very high while that of rubber is very low.

Perfectly plastic or inelastic body: if a body, elongated (or compressed) by external forces remains in that deformed state even after the withdrawal of these deforming forces, it is called a perfectly plastic or inelastic body. Actually, no material is perfectly inelastic, though clay comes very close to it.

Partly elastic body: If after the withdrawal of external forces, a deformed body only partially regains its original shape and volume then it is called a partly elastic body. Practically all materials are partly elastic.

Strain: Under the influence of external forces, when a body gets deformed, the different parts of the body suffer relative displacements. As a result, the body undergoes a change in length, volume, or shape.

Strain of a body is defined as the change of its length, volume, or shape relative to its original length, volume, or shape before deformation. So, it is a ratio of two identical quantities and hence it has no unit, i.e., strain is a dimen¬sionless quantity.

Stress: When a body gets deformed under the influence of external forces, a reaction force develops in the body because of elasticity.

This force tries to resist the external forces and helps to bring the body back to its unstrained condition after the deforming forces are withdrawn. The reaction force acting per unit area of the cross-section of the body is called stress.

Since action and reaction are opposite but equal, stress is equal in magnitude to the force applied per unit area of the deformed body.

Stress = \(\frac{\text { applied force }}{\text { area of cross-section of the body }}\)

Units and dimension of stress:

  • dyn. cm-2 CGS system
  • N. m-2 SI

Dimensional of stress = \(\frac{\text { dimension of force }}{\text { dimension of area }}=\frac{M L T^{-2}}{L^2}\) = ML-1T-2

We shall see that the units and dimension of stress is the same as that of pressure.

Normal stress and shearing or tangential stress: An applied force can act normally or obliquely on the surface of a body. The component of the reaction force perpendicular to a unit area of the surface is called normal stress.

Class 11 Physics Unit 7 Properties Of Matter Chapter 1 Elasticity Normal Stress And Shearing Or Tangential Stress

  • When there is any change in the length of a wire or in the volume of a body, normal stress is developed. The stress associated with an increase in length is called tensile stress and that associated with a decrease is called compressive stress.
  • On the other hand, the component of the reaction force parallel to a unit area of the surface is called shearing stress or tangential stress. Usually, shearing stress is developed during any change in the shape of a body.

Breaking load and breaking stress: if the external force exceeds the elastic limit, then a strained body cannot return to its original size or shape even after the deforming force is withdrawn.

  • In such a case, the body gets perma¬nently deformed. If the amount of the external force is increased gradually, then, for a particular value of the applied force, the body breaks or snaps.
  • The magnitude of force, or load, for which the body breaks or snaps is called the breaking load of that body. In that condition, the maximum reaction force developed per unit area of the surface of the body is called breaking stress. Every material has its characteristic breaking stress.

Elasticity Hooke’s Law

The fundamental law of elasticity was propounded by Robert Hooke in 1676. Later Thomas Young expressed this lawin the following way.

Hooke’s Law Experiment Procedure

Statement: Within the elastic limit of a substance, stress is directly proportional to strain.

Hence, stress ∝ strain or, \(\frac{\text { stress }}{\text { strain }}\) = constant

This constant is called the modulus of elasticity for the material of the body. Therefore, the stress developed for unit strain is defined as the modulus of elasticity.

This modulus depends on the material of the body. The modulus of elasticity changes with temperature, in general. Usually, its value decreases with an increase in temperature.

Units and dimension of the modulus of elasticity: Since strain has no unit, the modulus of elasticity has the unit of stress.

Relation: \(1 \mathrm{~N} \cdot \mathrm{m}^{-2}(1 \mathrm{~Pa})=\frac{1 \mathrm{~N}}{1 \mathrm{~m}^2}=\frac{10^5 \mathrm{dyn}}{10^4 \mathrm{~cm}^2}\)

= \(10 \mathrm{dyn} \cdot \mathrm{cm}^{-2}\)

Similarly, the dimensions of the modulus of elasticity and of
stress are identical, which is ML-1T-2.

ElasticityStress Strain Graph (Load Exten Sion Graph Of A String)

Applications of Hooke’s Law in Experiments

Suppose a wire of uniform cross-section is clamped at its upper end with rigid support and a load is applied at its lower end which is then gradually increased.

As a result, the length of the wire goes on increasing. In the stress- strain graph of a ductile metallic wire has been shown. The different parts of this graph are described below.

1. Straight line OA: In this section, the stress on the wire is proportional to the strain, which means that the metal follows Hooke’s Aaftr. The wire behaves like a completely elastic body up to the point A.

2. Point A: This point indicates the proportionality limit.

3. Line segment AB: In this section, the ratio of stress and strain is comparatively less, which means that the metal does not follow Hooke’s law. However, after reaching this section of strain, if the stress is removed, then the wire will regain its original length, which means that the strain will again be zero.

4. Point B: This point indicates the elastic limit. In the case of most metals, the two points A and 6 are found to be quite close to each other. In the case of glass, A, and B are identical points and in the case of rubber, the distance between A and B is quite high.

5. Line segment BC: In this section, stress divided by strain becomes even less and the metal gradually loses its elastic property and becomes plastic. After reaching this section of strain, if the stress is removed, then the wire is unable to regain its original length. So, the wire undergoes a permanent deformation.

6. Point C: This point is called the yield point or the upper yield point. At this point, the stress level is known as yield stress. The yield point for most substances can¬not be determined accurately.

Limitations of Hooke’s Law in Experiments

7. Line segment CD: In this section, stress divided by strain is negative. It implies that even if stress is decreased, strain will increase.

8. Point D: This point is called the lower yield point. If the stress is gradually decreased after the strain reaches this point, the return graph is not along DO, but along DO’. In this case OO’ indicates the permanent deformation.

For bodies with nearly perfect elasticity, the points A, B, C, and D are situated so close to one another that practically the four points can be assumed to be identical.

9. Line segment DE: In this section, stress divided by strain is the least and the metal becomes plastic. The cross-section of certain parts of a wire becomes comparatively lower than that of the remaining parts.

10. Point E: At point E the stress reaches its maximum value. At this point, the material of the wire flows like a viscous liquid and the wire becomes thin. Now, even if the load is decreased, the wire goes on thinning down.

11. Line segment EF: In this section, the area of the cross-section at different parts of the wire starts decreasing fast.

12. point F: At this point, the wire snaps from its weakest part. The stress corresponding to the point F is called breaking stress or the ultimate stress. This point F is called fracture or breaking point.

Ductile material: The materials which have large plastic range of extension are called ductile materials. As shown in the stress-strain curve in Fig, their fracture or breaking point is widely separated from the elastic limit. Such materials undergo an irreversible increase in length before snapping. So they can be drawn into thin wires. Copper, silver, iron, aluminum, etc., are examples of ductile materials.

Brittle material: The materials which have very small range of plastic limit of extension are called brittle materials.

Class 11 Physics Unit 7 Properties Of Matter Chapter 1 Elasticity String Graph Line Segment BC

Such materials break as soon as the stress is increased beyond the elastic limit. Their breaking point lies just close to their elastic limit as shown. Cast iron, glass, ceramic, etc., are examples of brittle materials.

Necessity of the stress-strain graph: For practical purposes, knowledge of the load-extension graph of a metal is absolutely essential. From this graph, the elastic limit of the material can be known.

For example, during the use of a machine, the stress developed on the axle or the other parts of the machine should be kept below the elastic limit of its material. For this, the stress-strain or the load-extension graphs of different materials are highly useful.

Elastic fatigue: If the force (or load) applied on an elastic body rises and falls rapidly and this periodic fluctuation continues for a long time, then the elastic property of the body gets degraded, even if the elastic limit for the material is not exceeded.

  • It means that the body remains permanently deformed in some respect, i.e.„ some part of the body becomes thinner and weaker, even after the deforming force is withdrawn. The body may then break or snap at a load less than the normal breaking load.
  • This kind of degradation of the elastic property of material due to rapid changes in stress is called elastic fatigue.

Elasticity Experimental Verification Of Hooke’s Law Determination Of Young’s Modulus

Calculating Spring Constant from Hooke’s Law

Searle’s Experiment: A uniform metal wire, about 2 to 3 m long, is hung from the roof of the laboratory. Initially, a small weight, usually called zero-load, is attached to the lower end of the wire. With the help of a screw gauge, the average diameter of the experimental wire is measured. Its length (L) is determined using a metre scale.

The load at the lower end of the wire is then gradually increased. Measuring the corresponding extensions with suitably fitted verniers, a graph can be plotted with the load along the X-axis and the elongation along the Y-axis. The graph passes through the origin and is a straight line.

Class 11 Physics Unit 7 Properties Of Matter Chapter 1 Elasticity Experimental Verification Of Hooke's Law

Experimental Verification of Hooke’s Law

As the graph is a straight line, we can say that, load ∝ elongation, i.e., stress ∝ strain (within the elastic limit). This proves the validity of Hooke’s law.

Calculation: From any point P on the graph, two perpendiculars are drawn on the axes.

Here, OQ = load (mg); OR = elongation (l).

Therefore, the longitudinal stress \(\frac{m g}{\pi r^2}\) and the longitudinal.

∴ Y = \(\frac{\text { longitudinal stress }}{\text { longitudinal strain }}=\frac{\frac{m g}{\pi r^2}}{\frac{l}{L}}=\frac{m g L}{\pi r^2 l}\)

Since the quantities on the right-hand side of the above expression are known, the value of Young’s modulus (Y) can be determined.

Class 11 Physics Class 12 Maths Class 11 Chemistry
NEET Foundation Class 12 Physics NEET Physics

Elasticity Synopsis

The property by virtue of which a body resists the defor¬mation either in shape or in volume or both, due to application of external forces on it and recovers its original shape or volume when the deforming force is withdrawn, is called elasticity.

  • A body cannot be perfectly elastic for all magnitudes of external force. Only up to a certain limit of external force a body can be perfectly elastic. This limit is known as the elastic limit for the material of that body.
  • Actually there is no perfectly elastic or perfectly inelastic material, rather all materials can be treated as partially elastic.

Under the influence of external deforming force the reaction force developed per unit area of cross section of a body is called stress. Stress of a body can be expressed as

stress = \(\frac{\text { applied force }}{\text { area of cross-section of the body }}\)

  • Relative displacements of different parts of an elastic body occur under the influence of external deforming force. As a result, the body undergoes change in length, volume, or shape. The fractional change in these quanti¬ties is known as strain.
  • Strain is always represented by the ratio of two identical quantities. It has no unit its dimension = 1
  • The applied force or load for which a body snaps or breaks is called the breaking load.

Hooke’s law: Within elastic limit, stress is directly proportional to strain. The amount of stress developed per unit strain is called elastic modulus.

Dimensions of elastic modulus and stress are identical and is ML-1T-2.

Class 11 Physics Unit 7 Properties Of Matter Chapter 1 Elasticity Dimensions Of Elastic Modulus And Stress Are Identical

  • The amount of force applied to produce unit elongation in a spring is called its force constant. Force constant of a spring represents its stiffness.
  • The loss in elastic capability of a body due to repeated and rapid increase or decrease in the force applied on it is known as elastic fatigue.

Elasticity Useful Relations For Solving Numerical Problems

Hooke’s law: \(\frac{\text { stress }}{\text { strain }}=\text { elastic modulus }\)

Class 11 Physics Unit 7 Properties Of Matter Chapter 1 Elasticity Hooke's Law

Y = \(3 K(1-2 \sigma)=2 n(1+\sigma), \sigma=\frac{3 K-2 n}{6 K+2 n}\)

⇒ \(\frac{9}{Y}=\frac{1}{K}+\frac{3}{n}\)

Work done in stretching wire,

Hooke’s Law

W = \(\frac{1}{2} F l=\frac{1}{2} \frac{Y A l^2}{L}\)

In deforming a body, the work done per unit volume potential energy stored per unit volume of the body (energy density) = 1/2 x stress x strain .

For a force F applied on a spring, if its increase in length is x, then F∝x or, F = kx (where k = force constant of the spring]

 

WBBSE Solutions For Class 7 Maths Algebra Chapter 3 Laws Exercise 3 Solved Example Problems

Algebra Chapter 3 Laws Exercise 3 Solved Example Problems

Algebra Introduction

In this chapter, we shall discuss some phenomena known to you in a different manner.

Actually, out of the four basic operations namely addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division only addition and multiplication (and in some special cases division also) abide by some laws.

WBBSE Class 7 Algebra Laws Solutions

Read and Learn More WBBSE Solutions For Class 7 Maths

These laws are:

  1. Commutative law
  2. Associative law and
  3. Distributive law.

These laws play an important role in higher mathematics, especially in classical and modern algebra and also in the theory of sets. Let us have a look at these laws, starting with very simple examples.

Laws

Wbbse Class 7 Maths Solutions

Commutative law 

You know that, 7 + 8 = 15

Again, 8 + 7 = 15

Therefore, 7 + 8 = 8 + 7.

So, it may be said that, if a and 6 be any two integers then, a+b = b+a.

In the above equation, we see that on the left-hand side a is in the first position and b is after a while on the right-hand side b is in the first position and a is after b.

This law, where a and b interchange their positions is known as commutative law.

Also, you know that, 7 x 4 = 28 and also, 4 x 7 = 28

Therefore, 7 x 4 = 4 x 7.

So, it may be said that, if a and b are two integers then, axb= bxa.

Thus, the commutative law is also applicable in the case of multiplication.

Illustration: 1. Suppose, you have 6 mangoes and your brother has 4 mangoes. Thus the total number of mangoes can be obtained by adding your mangoes with your brother’s share i.e., 4 + 6 = 10.

Again we can find the total number of mangoes by adding your brother’s mangoes with your mangoes i.e., 6 + 4 = 10. Therefore, 4 + 6 = 6 + 4.

Hence, we can say that the addition of 6 with 4 and the addition of 4 with 6 give the same result. Thus if 4 and 6 change their places, their sum remains unaltered.

2. Suppose, in a garden, there are 4 rows of trees and in each row, there are 3 trees.

Then the total number of trees in the garden = 3 x 4 = 12.

Also in another garden, there are 3 rows of trees and in each row, there are 4 trees.

Then the total number of trees in the garden is 4 x 3 = 12. Thus we see that, 3×4 = 4×3.

Associative law

The sum 4 + 5 + 7 may be written in different ways.

If, at first 5 is added with 4 and then 7 is added with this result of addition then it may be written as (4 + 5) + 7 = 9 + 7=16; again, if at first 7 is added with 5 and then the result of this addition is added with 4 then it may be written as 4 + (5 + 7) = 4 + 12 = 16.

So, it is clear that (4 + 5) + 7 = 4 + (5 + 7).

Therefore, in general, if a, 6 and c be three integers then, (a + 6) + c = a + (6 + c).

This is known as the associative law of addition.

The associative law is also applicable in the case of multiplication.

For example, we see that (2 x 3) x 4 = 6 x 4 = 24 and 2 x (3 x 4) = 2×12 = 24.

Therefore, in general, if a, b and c be three integers then it may be written in general that, (a x b) x c = a x (b x c).

WBBSE Class 7 Geography Notes WBBSE Solutions For Class 7 History
WBBSE Solutions For Class 7 Geography WBBSE Class 7 History Multiple Choice Questions
WBBSE Class 7 Geography Multiple Choice Questions WBBSE Solutions For Class 7 Maths

 

Illustration: 1. Suppose, you have 4 pens. Your brother has 3 pens and your sister has 2 pens.

At first, adding your and your brother’s pens the total number of pens becomes 4 + 3 = 7.

Now adding this number the number of your sister’s pens the total number of pens becomes (4 + 3) + 2 = 7 + 2 = 9.

Again, adding your brother’s and sister’s pens, the total number of pens = 3+2 = 5.

Now adding with your pens, the sum of your brother’s and sister’s pens the total number of pens becomes 4+(3+2) = 4+5 – 9.

Thus counting the total number of pens in both ways we get, (4 + 3) + 2 = 4 + (3 + 2).

2. Suppose, a boy can do 5 sums per day and we are to find the number of sums that can be done by the boy in 4 weeks.

Since in 1 day the boy can do 5 sums therefore in 1 week (i.e., 7 days) the boy can do 5 x 7 = 35 sums.

Thus in 4 weeks the boy can do (5 x 7) x 4 = 35 x 4 = 140 sums.

Also we may think the issue from another point of view. The total number of days in 4 weeks = 7 x 4 = 28.

Since in 1 day the boy can do 5 sums, in 7 x 4 days the boy can do 5 x (7 x 4) = 5 x 28 = 140 sums.

Thus the total number of sums done by the boy is same in both cases.

Math Solution Of Class 7 Wbbse

Distributive law

You know that, 15 x 6 = 90

Again, since 6 = 4 + 2

∴ 15 x 6 = 15 x (4 + 2) = 15 x 4 + 15 x 2 = 60 + 30 = 90.

So, it may be said in general that, if a, b, and c are three integers then,

a x (b+c) = a x b + a x c and a x (b-c) = a x b -a x c.

So, in the case of multiplication, the distributive law is always applicable.

The distributive law of multiplication may also have the following forms:

(a+b) x c=a x c+b x c and (a-b) x c=a x c- b x c.

Let us now see that, how the distributive law may be applied in the case of division.

You know that, 35 ÷ 5 = 7 and 35 = 25 + 10

Now, (25+10) ÷ 5 = 25÷5 + 10 ÷ 5 = 5 + 2 = 7.

So, it may be said in general that, if a, b, and c are three integers then,

(a+b) ÷ c= a ÷ c + b ÷ c and (a-b) ÷ c= a ÷ c- b ÷c.

This distributive law of division is only applicable to the right-hand side.

If a, b, and c be three integers then it may be shown that,

c ÷ (a + b) ≠ c ÷ a + c ÷ b and c ÷ (a-b) ≠ c ÷a – c ÷ b.

Therefore, the distributive law of division is not applicable in this case.

Illustration: Suppose you can do 12 sums daily and your brother can do 8 sums daily.

In 10 days what will be the total number of sums done by you? We may solve this problem in two ways.

In one day the total sum done by you and your brother is (12 + 8) = 20.

Hence, the number of sums done in 10 days = {(12 + 8) x 10} = 20 x 10 = 200.

Again in 10 days, you can do 12 x 10 – 120 sums and in 10 days your brother can do 8 x 10 = 80 sums.

Hence, the total number of sums done by you and your brother in 10 days = 12 x 10 + 8 x 10 = 120 + 80 = 200.

Thus, we can say that, (12 + 8) x 10 = 12 x 10 + 8 x 10.

Use of brackets: In algebra, brackets are used in the same manner as in arithmetic. In general, four types of brackets are used.

They are:

  1. Line bracket —
  2. First bracket ( )
  3. Second bracket { }
  4. Third bracket [ ]

If in a question all the brackets are present then first of all, the operation under the line bracket is performed. After that, the operation under first bracket, second bracket, and third bracket are done in series after finding values inside the corresponding brackets.

Algebra Chapter 3 Laws Exercise 3 Some Problems With Commutative, Associative, And Distributive Laws And The Use Of Brackets

Example 1. Prove on the number axis that 4 + 3 = 3 + 4.

Solution:

Moving 4 units to the right of 0

we get to point 4. After this, moving 3 more units in the same direction we get point 7.

Thus, 4 + 3 = 7.

Again, at first moving 3 units to the right of 0 we get point 3. After this, moving 4 more units in the same direction we get to point 7. Thus, 3 + 4 = 7.

Hence, 4 + 3 = 3 + 4 (proved).

Example 2. Prove that : 4 x 5 = 5 x 4.

Solution:

4 x 5 = 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 = 20

5 x 4=4+4+4+4+4=20

Hence, 4 x 5 = 5 x 4 (proved).

Solved Problems for Class 7 Algebra Chapter 3

Example 3. Rewrite 2 + 3 + 5 in two different ways such that a single bracket is used in each case.

Solution: 2 + 3 + 5 = (2 + 3) + 5 and 2 + 3 + 5 = 2 + (3 + 5).

Example 4. Rewrite 5 x 6 x 7 in two different ways such that a single bracket is used in each case.

Solution:  5 x 6 x 7 = (5 x 6) x7 and 5 x 6 x 7 = 5 x (6 x 7).

Example 5.  In each of the following cases, determine which law of which operation has been used.

  1. a + b = b + a.
  2. a x b – b x a,
  3. (a + y) + z – x + (y + z).
  4. m x (n x p) = (m x n) x p.
  5. a x (6 + c) = a x b + a x c.
  6. (a + b) ÷ c = a ÷ c + b ÷ c.

Solution:

  1. Commutative law of addition.
  2. Commutative law of multiplication.
  3. Associative law of addition.
  4. Associative law of multiplication.
  5. Distributive law of multiplication,
  6. Distributive law of division.

Example 6. Add the sum of 3 and 7 with 5 and find the result.

Solution:

Given:

5 + (3 + 7) = 5 + 10 = 15

∴ 15.

The result is 15.

Example 7. From 50, subtract the sum of 25 and 15 and find the result.

Solution:

Given:

From 50, subtract the sum of 25 and 15

50 – (25 + 15) = 50 – 40 = 10

∴ 10.

The result is 10.

Class 7 Maths Laws Exercise Solutions

Example 8. Using the result (a + b). c = a.c + b.c prove that,

  1. (a – b).c=a.c -b.c.
  2. a. (b-c) = a.b- a.c.

Solution:

Given:

Using the result (a + b). c = a.c + b.c

1. (a – b).c + b.c = x.c + b.c [Assuming x = a – b]= (x + b).c [Using the given relation]

= {(a – b) + b}.c [Putting the value of x] = [a + {(-b + b)}].c [By associative property]

= [a + o].c [According to the definition of zero]

= a.c + o.c [Using the given relation]

= a.c + o = a.c [According to the definition of zero]

Now, a.c – b.c = {(a – b).c + b.c} – b.c [Putting the value of a.c]

= (a – b).c + {b.c – b.c} [By associative property]

= (a – b).c + o = (a – b).c

Hence, it is proved that (a – b).c = a.c – b.c.

2. a.(b – c)= (b – c).a [By commutative property]

= b.a – c.a [From the proof of 1st part]= a.b – a.c [By commutative property]

Hence, it is proved that a.(b – c) = a.b – a.c.

Example 9. Prove that,

  1. (a + b + c).x = a.x+ x + c.x.
  2. (a + b + c) = x.a+ x.b + x.c.

Example 9

Step-by-Step WBBSE Class 7 Algebra

Example 10. Prove that, (a + b) ÷ x = (a ÷ x) + (b ÷ x).

Example 10

Example 11. Simplify xyz (x + y + z).

Solution:

The given expression = xyz (x + y + z)

= xyz X x + xyz X y + xyz X z

∴ x2yz + xy2z + xyz2

∴ xyz (x + y + z) = x2yz + xy2z + xyz2

Example 12. Simplify : a(a2 + 5a – 6).

Solution:

The given expression

= a(a2 + 5a – 6)

= a x a2 + a x 5a – a x 6 = a3 + 5a2 – 6a

∴ a3 + 5a2 6a.

a(a2 + 5a – 6) = a3 + 5a2 6a.

Class 7 Maths Algebra Exercise Solutions

Example 13.  Simplify: \(\frac{x}{x-y}\)+\(\frac{y}{y-x}\)

Solution:

Example 13

Example 14. Simplify  WBBSE Solutions For Class 7 Maths Algebra Chapter 3 Laws Exercise 3 Problems On Commutative Associative Distributive Law And Use Of Brackets Example 14
Solution:

Example 14

Example 15. Simplify WBBSE Solutions For Class 7 Maths Algebra Chapter 3 Laws Exercise 3 Problems On Commutative Associative Distributive Law And Use Of Brackets Example 15
Solution :

Example 15

Example 16. Simplify:  WBBSE Solutions For Class 7 Maths Algebra Chapter 3 Laws Exercise 3 Problems On Commutative Associative Distributive Law And Use Of Brackets Example 16

Solution:

Example 16